JP6290355B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention provides a gaming machine capable of improving interest during an advantageous gaming state. A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state is managed by digesting a predetermined number of games, and a second advantageous gaming state in which the advantageous gaming state is managed by the number of acquired game media. In the advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state can be executed. [Selection] Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, for the purpose of improving gameability, it is possible to execute an unfavorable gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player and an advantageous gaming state that is a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player compared to the unfavorable gaming state. AT machines and ART machines are provided. In the conventional gaming machine, the end condition of the advantageous gaming state is a specific condition predetermined for each model. For example, a model that is set as “game number management” that ends when the advantageous gaming state has consumed a predetermined number of games, or “difference number management” that ends when the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number of medals. Or there is a model or the like designated as “payout number management”. In games in these advantageous game states, the period during which the advantageous game state continues is displayed, and the player can recognize the period during which the game in the advantageous game state continues.

  There have been proposed AT / ART machines that can execute various effects, lotteries, and the like so that the game during the advantageous game state digestion period does not become monotonous. For example, like the gaming machine of the following Patent Document 1, it is possible to control to a plurality of effect states including an effect state with a high number of added games.

JP 2014-018286 A

  However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 only allows selection of whether or not to report the number of added games for each additional number of games, and does not realize improvement of the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine. . In addition, the number of games is not necessarily added. Therefore, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, the duration of the advantageous gaming state does not exceed the player's prediction range, and the player may monotonously feel the game in the advantageous gaming state.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various game developments in an advantageous gaming state and improving the interest of the game.

A gaming machine of the present invention provided to solve such a problem includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination based on detection of a starting operation by the player by the detecting means, and based on detection of a starting operation by the player by the starting operation detecting means. A symbol changing means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels; a stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation by the player; based an the stop operation by the player is detected, to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means by the stop operation detection unit, the symbol variation A stop control means for performing stop control of the symbols that are variably displayed depending on the stage, and when it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the player is compared with the disadvantaged gaming state from the disadvantaged gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. A game state control means for controlling to shift to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, and when the advantageous gaming state is controlled by the gaming state control means, the internal winning combination determining means causes the stop operation detecting means to When a specific winning combination capable of stopping and displaying a specific symbol combination is determined when it is detected that the stop operation has been performed in a predetermined order, order notification means for informing the predetermined order is provided. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the notification can be executed until a predetermined number of games is consumed, and the notification until the number of acquired game media reaches a predetermined number. And a second advantageous gaming state capable rows, in a series of the advantageous gaming state, to allow the execution of the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous gaming state, the gaming of the first advantageous gaming state, It is possible to add the number of game media that can be acquired in the second advantageous gaming state .

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, various game developments can be realized in the advantageous gaming state, and the gaming preferences can be further improved.

  The present invention can realize various game developments in an advantageous gaming state, make the game more attractive to the player, and improve the gameability of the gaming machine.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows an example of a design code table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of a winning area, the operation order of a stop button, winnings, etc. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT0. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT1. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT2. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning area determination table for RT3. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of a state management table. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition diagram in 1st embodiment and 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition diagram in 2nd embodiment, 3rd embodiment, and 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state distribution table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition difference number determination table. It is a figure which shows the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the reel rotation start reception command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for normal states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for ART preparation states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the number of games on a sub control board, and shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows the difference sheet number addition lottery process in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of receiving the payout number command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the red 7, blue 7, and follow replay display process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of the blank display in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the process for ART states in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery process in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number of games addition in 2nd embodiment, and shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows the difference sheet number addition lottery process in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process at the time of receiving the payout number command in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of calculation of the payout number in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of calculation of the payout number in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the unit secret numerical value addition process in 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number of games addition in 3rd embodiment, and shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows the difference sheet number addition lottery process in 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for ART states in 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of calculation of the payout number in 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of calculation of the payout number in 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 1st ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process for 2nd ART states at the time of the reel rotation start reception in 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of the ART state of 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of the ART state of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of the ART state of 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display screen in the ART state of 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of the ART state of 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of the ART state of 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the ART state of 5th embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
≪First embodiment≫
The gaming machine 1 of the present invention has a first ART state in which the end condition of the ART state is managed by managing a predetermined number of games (number of games) in the ART state (advantageous gaming state), and the end of the ART state. It is possible to execute a second ART state in which conditions are managed (difference number management) when the number of acquired medals (game media) reaches a predetermined number. Here, the difference number indicates the number of medals substantially increased by subtracting the number of BETs (betting medals) from the number of medals obtained by winning.

  Note that the “ART state” in the following description refers to the case where “push order bell” is determined as the winning area by the internal lottery process described later, regardless of whether the state is the first ART state or the second ART state. In this state, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying a predetermined symbol combination on the effective line is notified.

  Further, of the information related to the ART state (advantageous game state notification means), the information suggesting that the ART state is the first ART state of the game number management and the ART state suggesting that the ART state is the second ART state of the difference number management. This information will be described as “unit information”. The numerical information relating to the number of games when the ART state is the first ART state and the numerical information relating to the difference number when the ART state is the second ART state will be referred to as “numerical information”.

  Further, in the following description, the “initial state” indicates a state in which the first game is started in the ART state, the first ART state, and the second ART state. For example, in the case where the ART state includes both the first ART state and the second ART state, the game in the first ART state is performed first, and then the game in the second ART state is performed. The “initial state of the ART state” means the same state as the initial state of the first ART state, and is a state where the first game in the first ART state is started. Further, the “initial state of the second ART state” in this case is a state in which the game in the first ART state is finished and the game in the second ART state is started.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. Moreover, FIG. 3 is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2, hinge mechanism 2a, front door 3)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. Moreover, the front door 3 is pivotally supported by the hinge mechanism 2a provided on the front left side of the cabinet 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 4)
The keyhole 4 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a special key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work, the change of the set value, etc. are completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Side lamps 5a, 5b)
The side lamps 5a and 5b are provided at the left and right ends of the front door 3 when viewed from the front, and incorporate high-intensity light emitting diodes. Further, the side lamps 5a and 5b are designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision, and at a predetermined timing such as during an ART state described later, Control to turn on or blink is performed. The side lamps 5a and 5b may be collectively referred to as “side lamp 5”.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the right side of a cross key 19 to be described later and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(1BET button 7)
The 1BET button 7 is provided below a start lamp 23 which will be described later, and is provided to use “1” medals among the credited medals for the game.

(MAX-BET button 8)
The MAX-BET button 8 is provided on the right side of the 1BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and among the stored medals, the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game (one game) is used for the game. Is provided. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of usable medals in one game is “3”. The 1 BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 may be collectively referred to as “BET buttons 7, 8”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided below the 1BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of stored medals among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided on the right side of the settlement button 9 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to detect a start operation that triggers the start of rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. ing. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c described later. Perform the process. Further, the grip ball portion of the start lever 10 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, and a start lever effect lamp 42 described later is built in the grip ball portion. Then, the after-mentioned effect control board 410 performs lighting / flashing control of the start lever effect lamp 42 on the basis that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thereby, an effect appealing to the player's vision is performed.

(Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13, stop button unit 14)
The left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are provided on the right side of the start lever 10 as viewed from the front, and are unitized by a stop button unit 14. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are provided to detect a stop operation that triggers the player to stop the rotation of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, which will be described later. It has been. The left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 may be collectively referred to as “stop buttons 11, 12, 13”.

(Return button 15)
The return button 15 is provided on the right side of the stop button unit 14 when viewed from the front. The return button 15 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 16 described later.

(Selector 16)
The selector 16 is provided inside the medal insertion slot 6 and is provided for determining whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate. The selector 16 is provided with a medal sensor 16s for detecting the passage of an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is an appropriate medal, the appropriate medal is guided to the hopper 520 described later by the hopper guide member 522 described later. To do. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, the medal payout port 33, which will be described later, ejects the medal from the medal payout opening 33, which will be described later.

(Left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, right reel 17c, reel unit 17d)
The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are provided inside the cabinet 2, and each has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the circumferential surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. Yes. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotationally driven by exciting stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are unitized by a reel unit 17d, and the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c are attached to and detached from the gaming machine 1. Is easy. The left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c may be collectively referred to as “reel 17”.

(Direction button 18)
The effect button 18 is provided on the right side of the MAX-BET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 18 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the effect button detection switch 18sw detects the operation of the effect button 18. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, is controlled. The 1BET button 7 and the MAX-BET button 8 can be shared with the effect button 18 without providing the effect button 18. In this case, the main control board 300 to be described later (a) when the operation of the 1BET button 7 is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, (b) the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw. In this case, control is performed to transmit a predetermined command to a sub-control board 400 described later. The sub control board 400 described later performs control of the liquid crystal display device 46 described later based on the reception of the predetermined command. As a result, there is no need to provide a separate production button 18, and the number of parts can be reduced.

(Cross key 19)
The cross key 19 is provided on the right side of the effect button 18 when viewed from the front, and can be pressed in at least two directions (usually four directions) and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The cross key 19 is connected to a cross key detection switch 19sw, and a sub-control board 400 described later provides an effect control board 410 described later when the cross key detection switch 19sw detects an operation of the cross key 19. Then, the liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, is controlled.

(Panel 20)
The panel 20 includes a display window 21, production lamps 22a to 22j, a start lamp 23, BET lamps 24a to 24c, a stored number display unit 25, a game state display lamp 26, a payout number display unit 27, a throw-in display unit 28, It comprises a game display lamp 29 and stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c.

(Display window 21)
The display window 21 is provided in the center portion of the panel 20 so as to make the reel 17 visible. Specifically, the pattern drawn on the peripheral surface of the reel 17 is made visible by transmitting the area corresponding to the display window 21 in the panel 20.

(Direction lamps 22a-22j)
The effect lamps 22a to 22j are provided on the back side of the transmissive portions at the left and right ends of the panel 20, and emit light under a predetermined condition to notify the current state (for example, an ART state described later). Is provided. More specifically, the effect lamps 22 a to 22 e are provided on the left side of the display window 21 in front view, and the effect lamps 22 f to 22 j are provided on the right side of the display window 21 in front view. The effect lamps 22a to 22j may be collectively referred to as “effect lamp 22”.

(Start lamp 23)
The start lamp 23 is provided above the 1BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation of the start lever 10 can be accepted. Specifically, the main control board 300 (a) when “3” medals are inserted into the medal slot 6, (b) the number of stored medals is “3” or more, When the number of inserted sheets is “3” due to the operation of the BET buttons 7 and 8, (c) when a combination of symbols related to replay described later is displayed on the active line, the start lamp By illuminating 23, control is performed to notify that the start operation by the start lever 10 can be accepted.

(BET lamps 24a-24c)
The BET lamps 24a to 24c are provided on the right side of the start lamp 23 when viewed from the front, and are provided to notify the number of inserted medals used in the game. Specifically, when the number of medals used for the game is “1”, the BET lamp 24a is turned on, and when the number of medals used for the game is “2”, the BET lamp When 24b is lit and the number of medals used in the game is “3”, the BET lamp 24c is lit. The BET lamps 24a to 24c may be collectively referred to as “BET lamp 24”.

(Storage number indicator 25)
The stored number indicator 25 is provided on the right side of the BET lamp 24 when viewed from the front. Further, the stored number display unit 25 is provided for displaying the number of stored medal medals of the player and stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Game state display lamps 26a and 26b)
The game state display lamps 26 a and 26 b are provided on the right side of the stored number display unit 25 in front view. Further, the gaming state display lamps 26a and 26b are notified of the current gaming state by performing light emission control by the main control board 300. The game state display lamps 26a and 26b may be collectively referred to as “game state display lamps 26”.

(Payout number display 27)
The payout number display device 27 is provided on the right side of the game state display lamp 26b in front view. The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols arranged on the activated line activated by operating the BET buttons 7 and 8. . The payout number display 27 is provided for displaying that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 17a among the three symbols of the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c displayed on the display window 21; Only the “downwardly right line” obtained by connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b and the symbol displayed in the lower stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is an effective line. Note that the right-down line may be simply referred to as “down-right”.

  It should be noted that a line connecting the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c is “upper” or “upper line”. May be written. Further, a line connecting the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “middle stage” or “middle stage line”. May be written. In addition, a line connecting the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the right reel 17c is a “lower” or “lower line” May be written. Also, a line that connects the symbol displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 17a, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 17b, and the symbol displayed at the upper stage of the right reel 17c with a straight line is “upward to the right” or “right” It may be described as “rising line”.

(Putable indicator lamp 28)
The insertable display lamp 28 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 27 as viewed from the front. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn on the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 can be stored. On the other hand, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 when the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 cannot be stored.

  In this embodiment, since the maximum number of medals that can be stored is “50”, the main control board 300 described later can be inserted when the number of stored medals is less than “50”. Control to turn on the display lamp 28 is performed, and control to turn off the insertable display lamp 28 is performed when the number of stored medals is “50”. In addition, when the combination of symbols related to replay to be described later is displayed on the active line, control is performed to turn off the displayable display lamp 28.

(Replay display lamp 29)
The replay display lamp 29 is provided below the thrown-in display lamp 28. The re-game display lamp 29 is lit when a combination of symbols related to re-game to be described later is displayed on the active line. As a result, a combination of symbols related to “re-game” is displayed on the active line for the player, and the player can perform the next game without using a medal. It is informing that it is.

(Stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c)
The stop operation order display lamps 30 a to 30 c are provided below the display window 21. Specifically, the stop operation order display lamp 30a is provided below the left reel 17a, the stop operation order display lamp 30b is provided below the middle reel 17b, and the stop operation order display lamp 30c is , Provided below the right reel 17c. In addition, the stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c are used to notify the player of the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300 described later. Is provided. Specifically, when it is the optimal timing to stop the left stop button 11, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30a is turned on or blinked, and the intermediate stop button 12 is stopped at the optimal timing. In some cases, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30b is lit or blinked, and when the right stop button 13 is operated to be stopped at an optimal timing, the stop operation sequence display lamp 30c is lit or blinked to optimize the operation. The stop operation order is notified. The stop operation order display lamps 30a to 30c may be collectively referred to as “stop operation order display lamp 30” in some cases.

(Lumbar panel 31)
The waist panel 31 is provided below the stop button unit 14 and is provided for allowing the player to recognize a model name, a motif, and the like. Specifically, a picture of an appearing character is drawn. In addition, a light (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the waist panel 31. By emitting the light (not shown), the player can easily recognize the model name, the motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray receiving unit 32)
The tray unit 32 is provided below the waist panel 31 and is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 33 described later.

(Medal payout exit 33)
The medal payout port 33 is provided to discharge medals paid out by the hopper 520 when the hopper 520 described later is driven when paying out medals based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. It has been. Further, when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal, or when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited. It is provided for discharging medals inserted into the insertion slot 6 to the tray unit 32 via the medal payout opening 33.

  In this embodiment, when the medal insertion acceptance is prohibited, (a) when the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c are rotating, or (b) a combination of symbols related to replaying. The case where it is displayed on the active line.

(Lower speakers 34a, 34b)
The lower speakers 34a and 34b are provided on both the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 33, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, and the like when performing an effect. The lower speakers 34a and 34b may be collectively referred to as “lower speaker 34”.

(Upper speakers 35a, 35b)
The upper speakers 35a and 35b are provided on both the left and right sides of a liquid crystal display device 46, which will be described later, and are provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect, similar to the lower speaker 34. . The upper speakers 35a and 35b may be collectively referred to as “upper speaker 35”, and the lower speaker 34 and the upper speaker 35 may be collectively referred to as “speakers 34 and 35”.

(Setting display section 36)
The setting display unit 36 is provided for displaying the current setting value. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a key hole (not shown) and is rotated by a predetermined angle, the main control board 300 displays the currently set value on the setting display unit 36. I do.

(Setting change button 37)
The setting change button 37 is provided for changing the setting value. Here, the method for changing the setting value is as follows. First, as described above, the setting value that is currently set is displayed by rotating a predetermined angle in a state where a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. 36. Next, by operating the setting change button 37, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is switched and displayed. Therefore, the setting change button 37 is pressed until the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Repeat the operation. Then, the start lever 10 is operated while the setting value to be determined is displayed on the setting display unit 36. Next, an operation of returning the rotated setting change key to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed is performed. By performing these operations, the set value is changed.

  Here, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, no error release button for releasing the error is provided. For this reason, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1, the main control board 300 performs control to return from the error state based on the fact that a setting change switch 37sw described later detects an operation of the setting change button 37. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 37 has a function for switching the setting value and a function for returning from the error state.

  In this embodiment, the setting value is set in six stages from “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the setting change is performed in a state where “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36. When the button 37 is operated, “2” is displayed on the setting display section 36. Thereafter, every time the setting change button 37 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display section 36 is added and displayed by “1”. The However, when the setting change button 37 is operated in a state where “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 36, “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 36.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the reel 17 to provide an effect of displaying moving images, still images, and the like. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 46 is provided for notifying information related to the result of an internal lottery process described later, or notifying information necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols related to winning on the active line. It has been. Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 46, like the stop operation order display lamp 30, is based on the winning area determined by the main control board 300, which will be described later, and the optimal stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. To the player.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the reel 17, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. Details of the main control board 300 will be described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub control board 400 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided for controlling the liquid crystal display device 46 and the speakers 34 and 35. Details of the sub control board 400 will be described later.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of a hopper 520 (described later) in front view, and is provided to supply power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 520)
The hopper 520 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the right side of the power supply device 510 in front view, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Further, the hopper 520 is driven and controlled based on a predetermined signal from a main control board 300 described later. The power supply board 500 described later determines whether or not a predetermined number of medals have been discharged by a medal sensor (not shown) provided in the hopper, and determines that a predetermined number of medals have been discharged. Then, a signal indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out is transmitted to the main control board 300. Thereby, the main control board 300 described later can recognize that the payout of a predetermined number of medals has been completed.

(Discharge slit 521)
The discharge slit 521 is provided in the hopper 520 and is provided to discharge medals from the hopper 520.

(Hopper guide member 522)
The hopper guide member 522 is provided to guide the determined medal to the hopper 520 when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is an appropriate medal. .

(Guide member 523)
The guide member 523 has a foreign object or an appropriate medal when a foreign object is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when the medal sensor 16s determines that the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. It is provided to guide the medal determined to be not to the medal payout exit 33.

(Discharge guide member 524)
The payout guide member 524 is provided to guide the medals discharged from the discharge slit 521 of the hopper 520 to the medal payout outlet 33 side of the tray unit 32.

(Auxiliary storage unit 530)
The auxiliary storage unit 530 is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 520 overflow.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a reel control board 100, a relay board 200, a sub control board 400, and a power supply board 500 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301, a main ROM 302, a main RAM 303, a random number generator 304, and an I / F (interface) circuit 305. The main control board 300 is connected to a setting display section 36, a setting change switch 37sw, and an external concentrated terminal board 38.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 reads a program stored in the main ROM 302 and performs predetermined arithmetic processing in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby causing the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500 to be processed. A predetermined signal is transmitted.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table such as a winning area determination table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes a later-described symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 5), a later-described symbol code table (see FIG. 6), a later-described symbol combination table (see FIG. 7), and a later-described RT0 winning area determination table. (See FIG. 9), RT1 winning area determination table (see FIG. 10) described later, RT2 winning area determination table (see FIG. 11) described later, RT3 winning area determination table (see FIG. 12) described later, and the like are stored. doing.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for storing various data determined by execution of programs by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 stores (a) an effect transmission data storage area for transmitting a command to a sub-control board 400, which will be described later, and (b) that replaying is in operation. (C) a re-game in-operation flag storage area, (c) a winning area determining random value storage area for storing a random value extracted by a random number generator 304 described later when performing an internal lottery process described later; A game state storage area for storing a game state, (e) a lottery number storage area for storing the number of lotteries when performing an internal lottery process to be described later, and (f) a stepping motor 101, 102, 103 for reels When the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated in the state in which the stop button 17 is rotated, the pressure reference position storage area for storing the reference pressure position acquired when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated. Medal insertion number storage area for storing the number of dull, is provided with (h) a storage area such as a winning area storage area for storing information relating to the winning area determined by the internal lottery process described later.

(Random number generator 304)
The random number generator 304 is provided to generate a random number for determining a winning area or the like. Here, in the present embodiment, the random number generator 304 generates the random value R1 in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(IF circuit 305)
An I / F (interface) circuit 305 is a circuit for transmitting and receiving signals (commands) between the main control board 300 and the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, the sub control board 400, and the power supply board 500. .

(Setting change switch 37sw)
The setting change switch 37sw is a switch for detecting that the setting change button 37 has been operated. When the setting change button 37 is detected by the setting change switch 37sw in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole and rotated by a predetermined angle, the main CPU 301 displays the setting display. Control to switch and display the set value on the unit 36 is performed.

  Further, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw in the error state.

(External concentration terminal board 38)
The external concentration terminal board 38 is provided inside the gaming machine 1 and, for a hall computer (not shown), (a) a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6, and (b) a player. The medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, (c) the game state transition signal that can specify the transition to the RT3 gaming state, and (d) the rotation start of the reel 17 can be specified. It is provided for outputting a predetermined signal such as a reel rotation start signal.

(Relay board 200)
The relay board 200 includes a 1BET switch 7sw, a MAX-BET switch 8sw, a checkout switch 9sw, a start switch 10sw, a left stop switch 11sw, a middle stop switch 12sw, a right stop switch 13sw, a medal sensor 16s, a start lamp 23, and a BET lamp 24. The stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the insertion possible display lamp 28, the re-game display lamp 29, the selector sensor 39s, the reset key sensor 40s, and the door opening sensor 41s are connected.

(1BET switch 7sw)
The 1BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the 1BET button 7 by the player is detected by the 1BET switch 7sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use “1” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(MAX-BET switch 8sw)
The MAX-BET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player. Further, when the operation of the MAX-BET button 8 by the player is detected by the MAX-BET switch 8sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. . Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to use “3” medals from the medals stored by the player based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The 1 BET switch 7sw and the MAX-BET switch 8sw may be collectively referred to as “BET switches 7sw, 8sw”.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9 by the player. Further, when an operation of the payment button 9 by the player is detected by the payment switch 9sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 outputs a signal indicating that the stored medal is to be returned to the power supply board 500 based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the relay board 200. And the power supply board 500 performs control which returns the medal currently stored by the hopper 520. FIG.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10 by the player. Further, when the start switch 10sw detects the operation of the start lever 10 by the player, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for starting the rotation of the reel 17 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11 by the player. When the operation of the left stop button 11 by the player is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating left reel 17a based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player. Further, when the operation of the middle stop button 12 by the player is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating middle reel 17b based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player. Further, when the operation of the right stop button 13 by the player is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotating right reel 17c based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200. The left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw may be collectively referred to as “stop switches 11sw, 12sw, 13sw”.

  In the present embodiment, the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw are provided so that the ON / OFF of the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 can be detected. Therefore, when the stop button 11, 12, 13 is operated by the player (ON edge), and after the player operates the stop button 11, 12, 13, the player's finger is moved to the stop button 11, 12, 13 (OFF edge) is provided so as to be detected.

(Medal sensor 16s)
The medal sensor 16s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, when the medal sensor 16s detects a normal medal passage, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when a medal is inserted based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Selector sensor 39s)
The selector sensor 39s is a sensor for detecting fraud. Further, when an illegal act is detected by the selector sensor 39 s, the relay board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process performed when an illegal act is detected based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Reset key sensor 40s)
The reset key sensor 40s is a sensor for detecting that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction. When the reset key sensor 40s detects that a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction, the relay board 200 is connected to the I of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is transmitted to the / F circuit 305. Then, the main CPU 301 performs control for returning from the error state based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the relay board 200.

(Door open sensor 41s)
The door opening sensor 41 s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 4 and is a sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 3. In the present embodiment, the door opening sensor 41s includes a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. When a dedicated key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 4 and the dedicated key is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening sensor 41s is illustrated. The locking portion that does not rotate will rotate. And when the said locking part rotates, the light light-emitted from the light emission part does not reach a light-receiving part. Thus, the door opening sensor 41s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Power supply board 500)
A power supply device 510, a hopper 520, and an auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s are connected to the power supply substrate 500.

(Power supply device 510)
The power supply device 510 includes a power button 511 and a power switch 511sw.

(Power button 511)
The power button 511 is provided for a store clerk or the like of the game store to perform an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power button 511 is connected to a power switch 511sw.

(Power switch 511sw)
The power switch 511sw is a switch for detecting that the power button 511 is operated. Further, power is supplied to the entire gaming machine 1 based on the detection of the operation of the power button 511 by the power switch 511sw.

(Auxiliary storage part full tank sensor 530s)
The auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530 s is a sensor for detecting that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530. When the auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530 s detects that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530, the power supply board 500 is connected to the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300. A predetermined signal is output. Then, when the main control board 300 receives a predetermined signal, control is performed to make an error state.

(Reel control board 100)
Stepping motors 101, 102, 103, a left reel sensor 111s, a middle reel sensor 112s, and a right reel sensor 113s are connected to the reel control board 100.

(Stepping motors 101, 102, 103)
Stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 are provided for rotationally driving the reel 17. Further, the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 have a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. Then, the driving force of the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 is transmitted to the reel 17 through a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. As a result, the reel 17 rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103. The main CPU 301 manages the rotation angle of the reel 17 by counting the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 101, 102, 103 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 111s)
The left reel sensor 111s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the left reel 17a has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

(Medium reel sensor 112s)
The middle reel sensor 112s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the middle reel 17b has rotated once by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion.

(Right reel sensor 113s)
The right reel sensor 113s is a sensor for detecting a reel index indicating that the right reel 17c has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. The left reel sensor 111s, the middle reel sensor 112s, and the right reel sensor 113s may be collectively referred to as “reel sensors 111s, 112s, 113s”.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is a board mainly for controlling effects. The sub control board 400 includes an I / F (interface) circuit 401, a sub CPU 402, a random number generator 403, a sub ROM 404, a sub RAM 405, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) device 406. Further, the effect button detection switch 18sw, the cross key detection switch 19sw, the effect control board 410, and the amplifier control board 440 are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Production button detection switch 18sw)
The effect button detection switch 18sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the effect button 18 by the player. In addition, when the operation of the effect button 18 by the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18sw, the sub control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the effect button 18 by the player.

(Cross key detection switch 19sw)
The cross key detection switch 19sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the cross key 19 by the player. When the operation of the cross key 19 by the player is detected by the cross key detection switch 19sw, the sub-control board 400 performs control based on the operation of the cross key 19 by the player.

(I / F circuit 401)
An I / F (interface) circuit 401 is provided to receive a signal from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300.

(Sub CPU 402)
The sub CPU 402 reads an effect program stored in the sub ROM 404 and performs a predetermined calculation based on a command from the main control board 300, an input signal of the effect button detection switch 18sw, and the cross key detection switch 19sw. The calculation result is provided to supply the effect control board 410 and the amplifier control board 440.

(Random number generator 403)
The random number generator 403 is provided to generate a random number used when determining an effect or the like performed by the liquid crystal display device 46, the speakers 34, 35, and the like. The random number generator 403 generates random numbers such as a random value R2 for lottery to enter an ART preparation state, which will be described later, and a random value R3 for determining an additional game number and an additional difference number in an ART state, which will be described later. It is provided to make it.

(Sub ROM 404)
The sub ROM 404 is a program for executing effects, a state management table (see FIG. 14) described later, an effect determination table (see FIG. 17) described later, an ART ready state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 18) described later, ART preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 19) described later, promotion lottery table (see FIG. 20) described later, additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) described later, and additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) described later. Etc. are provided for storing etc. The sub ROM 404 is mainly composed of a program storage area and a table storage area.

(Sub RAM 405)
The sub RAM 405 functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 402 performs arithmetic processing. Specifically, there are provided a storage area for storing various data such as a winning area transmitted from the main control board 300, and a storage area for storing the determined contents and effects data. Specifically, in the sub RAM 405, (a) a state number storage area for storing a state managed by the sub control board 400, (b) an ART preparation state A, an ART preparation state B, and an ART preparation state C described later. An ART ready state storage area for storing which ART ready state is stored, (c) a game number counter for storing the number of games that can be played in the first ART state described later, (d) A difference number counter for storing a difference number that can be acquired in a game in a second ART state, which will be described later, and (e) an ART preparation state for storing the number of games until the transition to the ART preparation state in a normal state, which will be described later. A transition game number counter and the like are provided.

(RTC device 406)
The RTC device 406 is provided for counting a predetermined counter value at a counting interval different from a count value counted by a frame counter 425 described later. The RTC device 406 is provided for acquiring the current date and time.

(Production control board 410)
The effect control board 410 is a board mainly for executing effects. The effect control board 410 includes an image control unit 420 and a lamp control unit 430.

(Image control unit 420)
The image control unit 420 is provided to control the display of the liquid crystal display device 46 mainly when performing an effect. The image control unit 420 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 421, a liquid crystal control CPU 422, a liquid crystal control ROM 423, a liquid crystal control RAM 424, a frame counter 425, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 426, a VRAM 427, a sound source IC 428, and a sound source ROM 428. Have. Further, the general-purpose board 45 and the lamp control unit 430 are connected to the image control unit 420.

(General purpose board 45)
The general-purpose substrate 45 is provided between the image control unit 420 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and has a bridge function for converting the image data into a predetermined image format when displaying the image data. Further, the general-purpose board 45 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the liquid crystal display device 46 for displaying image data. For example, a difference in resolution between when an SXGA (1280 dots × 1080 dots) 19-inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected and when an XGA (1024 dots × 768 dots) 17-inch liquid crystal display device 46 is connected Absorbs.

(VDP421)
The VDP 421 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 422. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated and output to the general-purpose substrate 45, thereby performing control of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46. The VDP 421 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus I / F, a CPU I / F, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus. .

(Liquid crystal control CPU 422)
The liquid crystal control CPU 422 is provided for creating a display list based on the command received from the sub control board 400 and transmitting the display list to the VDP 421. Further, the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs control to display the image data stored in the CGROM 426 on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 423)
The liquid crystal control ROM 423 is configured by a mask ROM or the like, and includes a control processing program for the liquid crystal control CPU 422, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are stored. The animation pattern referred to here is referred to when displaying the animation of the production pattern, and stores a combination of animation scene information included in the production pattern, a display order of each animation scene information, and the like. In the animation scene information, a wait frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters (sprite display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, and effect image are displayed. Information such as information specifying a display device is stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 424)
The liquid crystal control RAM 424 is built in the liquid crystal control CPU 422. The liquid crystal control RAM 424 also functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 422 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 423.

(Frame counter 425)
The frame counter 425 is provided to receive a power supply from the power supply board 500 and count the frame counter value. The frame counter 425 stops counting the frame counter value when the supply of power from the power supply board 500 is stopped. Then, when the supply of power by the power supply substrate 500 is resumed, the frame counter 425 initializes the frame counter value registered in the register and resumes counting.

(CGROM426)
The CGROM 426 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), an EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a mask ROM, and the like. Further, the CGROM 426 compresses and stores image data (for example, sprites, movies) and the like that are a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). This pixel information is composed of color number information for designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 426 performs reading in units of image data by the VDP 421 and performs image processing in units of frame image data. Further, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed.

  In this embodiment, the CGROM 426 stores palette data in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other without being compressed. Not limited to this, a configuration in which only a part is compressed may be used. As a movie compression method, various compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

(VRAM427)
The VRAM 427 is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). Here, the SRAM is a readable / writable memory and is a kind of volatile memory for temporarily holding data. By configuring the VRAM 427 with SRAM, writing and reading of image data can be processed at high speed. The VRAM 427 is configured by a memory map including an arbitrary area, a display list area 1, a display list area 2, a frame buffer area 1, and a frame buffer area 2.

(Sound source IC428)
The sound source IC 428 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound from the sound source ROM 429 and generating sound signals for driving the speakers 34 and 35.

(Sound source ROM 429)
The sound source ROM 429 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, programs and data related to voice are stored.

(Ramp control unit 430)
The lamp control unit 430 is a board for controlling the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 mainly when performing an effect. The lamp control unit 430 includes a lamp control CPU 431, a lamp control ROM 432, and a lamp control RAM 433. In addition, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the start lever effect lamp 42, and the drive board 43 are connected to the lamp control unit 430.

(Start lever effect lamp 42)
The start lever effect lamp 42 is composed of a high-intensity light-emitting diode, and is provided to perform an effect visually appealing to the player based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the lamp control unit 430 controls lighting / flashing of the start lever effect lamp 42 based on the fact that a predetermined condition such as a case where a predetermined winning area is won is satisfied in an internal lottery process described later. I do.

(Drive board 43)
The drive substrate 43 is a substrate for performing control to move the effect device 44. Further, the drive board 43 performs control for moving the effect device 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the lamp control unit 430.

(Directing device 44)
The effect device 44 is provided on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, the lamp control unit 430 performs control to move the rendering device 44 to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive substrate 43 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the sub control substrate 400. Thus, a visual appeal to the player is performed.

(Lamp control CPU 431)
The lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data relating to light emission of the lamp and LED stored in the lamp control ROM 432, and emits the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. Is provided for generating a signal. In addition, the lamp control CPU 431 reads a program and data stored in the lamp control ROM 432, generates a signal for performing control to move the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46, and transmits the signal to the drive board 43. Is provided.

(Lamp control ROM 432)
The lamp control ROM 432 is provided for storing a program and data for executing an effect. Specifically, the lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like relating to light emission of the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42. The lamp control ROM 432 stores programs, data, and the like for moving the rendering device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 via the drive board 43.

(Ramp control RAM 433)
The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start lever effect lamp 42 are controlled to emit light. The lamp control RAM 433 is provided as a temporary storage area when the effect device 44 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are moved via the drive board 43.

(Amplifier control board 440)
The amplifier control board 440 is a board for outputting audio data mainly from the speakers 34 and 35. The amplifier control board is connected to a lower speaker amplifier 441 and an upper speaker amplifier 442.

(Lower speaker amplifier 441)
The lower speaker amplifier 441 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output it to the lower speaker 34.
(Upper speaker amplifier 442)
The upper speaker amplifier 442 is provided to amplify the audio signal from the sound source IC 428 and output the amplified audio signal to the upper speaker 35.

(Design arrangement table)
Next, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol arrangement table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the main CPU 301 detects the reel index, the symbol position in the middle of the display window 21 is defined as “00”. Further, “00” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are assigned to the symbols in the order of the reel rotation direction with reference to the symbol position “00”.

(Design code table)
Next, the symbol code table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol code table stores symbol codes corresponding to symbols arranged on the left reel 17a, middle reel 17b, and right reel 17c, and data corresponding to the symbols. Here, in this embodiment, when the symbol code is “01”, “00000001” is stored as data corresponding to the symbol “red 7”. Similarly, data corresponding to each symbol is stored for symbol codes “02” to “10”.

  Further, the type of the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified based on the symbol counter value (“00” to “20”), the symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 5), and the symbol code table. Can do. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it may be specified that the symbol “watermelon” at the symbol position “00” is displayed in the middle of the display window 21. it can. Similarly, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 17a is “00”, it is specified that the symbol “Replay 1” at the symbol position “01” is displayed in the upper part of the display window 21. It is possible to specify that the symbol “Bell 1” at the symbol position “20” is displayed in the lower part of the display window 21. When the symbol displayed on the display window 21 is specified, the main CPU 301 stores “00000101” as data in a predetermined storage area provided in the main RAM 303.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and prescribes symbol combinations determined in advance according to the type of privilege and the number of payouts. Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a replay, and plays bonus games. A privilege such as activation is given to the player. For example, when the symbol combination “Bell 1”, “Replay 1”, and “BAR1” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay 01”. It is determined that If the symbol combination displayed on the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”.

  Here, the “payout number” refers to the number of medals to be paid out to the player. When a value of “1” or more is determined as the payout number, medals are paid out. Specifically, medals are paid out when a combination of symbols in which a numerical value of “1” or more is defined as the payout number is displayed on the active line.

  In this embodiment, the combination of symbols related to “Bell 01 to 32”, “Watermelon 01 to 08”, “Cherry 01 to 21”, and “Special role 01 to 02” is displayed on the active line. Based on the above, medals are paid out.

  Here, the symbol combinations related to “Bell 01-32”, “Watermelon 01-08”, “Cherry 01-21”, “Special Role 01-02” are collectively referred to as “Combination of symbols related to winning”. May be described.

  Further, “bells 01 to 32” may be collectively referred to simply as “bell”. Further, “watermelon 01 to 08” may be collectively referred to as “watermelon” in some cases. In addition, “cherry 01 to 21” may be collectively referred to as “cherry” in some cases. Further, “special roles 01 to 02” may be collectively referred to simply as “special roles”.

  In this embodiment, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, “downward right replay 01 to 04”, “ When a combination of symbols related to “Preparation Replay 01-04”, “Follow Replay 01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 01-32”, and “Blue 7 Replay 01-06” is displayed on the active line, replay Is operated.

  Here, “middle replay 01-04”, “upper replay 01-18”, “lower replay 01-18”, “upward right replay 01-09”, “downward right replay 01-04”, “preparation replay 01- “04”, “Follow Replay 01-04”, “Red 7 Replay 01-32”, and “Blue 7 Replay 01-06” may be collectively referred to as “replay” or “replay”.

  Further, “middle stage replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “middle stage replays”. In addition, “upper replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “upper replay”. Further, “lower replays 01 to 18” may be collectively referred to simply as “lower replays”. Also, “upward replays 01 to 09” may be collectively referred to simply as “upward replays”. In addition, “right-down replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to as “right-down replay” in some cases. Further, “preparation replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “preparation replays”. Further, “follow replays 01 to 04” may be collectively referred to simply as “follow replays”. Further, “red 7 replays 01 to 32” may be collectively referred to simply as “red 7 replays”. Further, “blue 7 replay 01 to 06” may be collectively referred to simply as “blue 7 replay”. Further, “middle replay 01 to 04”, “upper replay 01 to 18”, “lower replay 01 to 18”, “upward right replay 01 to 09”, and “downward right replay 01 to 04” are collectively referred to as “normal”. "Replay" may be described.

  Further, “blanks 01 to 46” may be collectively referred to simply as “blanks”.

(Relationship between winning area, stop button operation sequence, winnings, etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 8, the relationship between the winning area, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  The RT0 winning area table, the RT1 winning area table, the RT2 winning area table, and the RT3 winning area table, which will be described later, stored in the main ROM 302, define winning areas of “00” to “24”. However, not all winning areas can be determined in all gaming states.

  For example, in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, the “losing” of the winning area “00” may be determined, while in the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state, the “losing” of the winning area “00” is determined. There is no possibility. Further, in the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility of determining “ART entry replay 01” in the winning area “01”, while in the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state, “ART entry” in the winning area “01”. There is no possibility of determining “Replay 01”.

  In this embodiment, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, winning areas having different combinations of symbols arranged on the effective line are provided depending on the stop operation order by the player. Specifically, “ART rush replay 01 to 03”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “preparation replay 01 to 04”, and “push order bell 01 to 08” are determined as winning areas by an internal lottery process described later. In this case, the combination of symbols arranged on the active line differs depending on the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 by the player. For example, when “ART entry replay 03” of the winning area “03” is determined as the winning area by the internal lottery process described later, even if the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated at the same symbol position, Different combinations of symbols are displayed on the active line when the left stop button 11 is operated and when the right stop button 13 is operated.

  On the other hand, when the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 are operated at the same symbol position, there is a winning area where the combination of symbols aligned on the active line is different regardless of the stop operation sequence by the player. Is provided. Specifically, through the internal lottery process described later, “Lose”, “Normal replay”, “Common bell”, “Weak watermelon”, “Strong watermelon”, “Weak cherry”, “Strong cherry”, “Special role 01 ”And“ special role 02 ”are determined as winning areas, no matter what order the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 are operated by the player, the combination of symbols on the active line is the same. It is. However, if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are not operated at an appropriate timing, the combination of symbols related to winning may not be displayed on the active line.

(Winning area determination table)
Next, the winning area determination table will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In this embodiment, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT0, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT1, and FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT2. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a winning area determination table for RT3.

  The winning area determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is provided for each gaming state. In this embodiment, an RT0 winning area determination table, an RT1 winning area determination table, an RT2 winning area determination table, and an RT3 winning area determination table are provided.

  In the winning area determination table, lottery values are defined for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, in the RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, and the RT3 winning area determination table, a lottery of “setting 1” to “setting 6” is selected. Each value is specified.

(RT0 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 9, the winning area determination table for RT0 includes the winning areas “losing”, “normal replay”, “push order bell 01-08”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “ Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “special role 01”, and “special role 02”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT0 gaming state, “ART rush replay 01 to 03”, “Blue 7 uniform replay”, and “Preparation replay 01 to 04” are determined as winning areas. There is nothing to do.

(RT1 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 10, the winning area determination table for RT1 is a winning area “losing”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “preparation replay 01-04”, “push order bell 01-08”, “common bell”, “ Lottery values are defined for “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “special role 01”, and “special role 02”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT1 gaming state, “ART rush replay 01 to 03” and “normal replay” are not determined as the winning area.

(RT2 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 11, the winning area determination table for RT2 includes the winning areas “ART rush replay 01 to 03”, “push order bell 01 to 08”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “ Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “special role 01”, and “special role 02”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT2 gaming state, “losing”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, “preparation replay 01 to 04”, and “normal replay” are determined as the winning areas. There is nothing to do.

(RT3 winning area determination table)
As shown in FIG. 12, the winning area determination table for RT3 is a winning area “normal replay”, “push order bell 01-08”, “common bell”, “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, “weak cherry”, Lottery values are defined for “strong cherry”, “special combination 01”, and “special combination 02”. That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and in the RT3 gaming state, “losing”, “ART rush replay 01-03”, “blue 7 uniform replay”, and “preparation replay 01-04” are won. It is never determined as an area.

  The RT0 winning area determination table, the RT1 winning area determination table, the RT2 winning area determination table, and the RT3 winning area determination table may be collectively referred to as “winning area determination table”.

  In the present embodiment, the RT2 gaming state and the RT3 gaming state have a lower probability that “losing” is determined as the winning area compared to the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state, so that it is relative to the player. This is an advantageous gaming state.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The gaming state transition diagram defines (a) the current gaming state, (b) the gaming state transition condition, and (c) the transition destination gaming state when the gaming state transition condition is satisfied. Here, in the present embodiment, when the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “blank” on the active line. Based on this, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301, based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, Control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Further, when the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the main CPU 301 displays one of the symbol combinations among the symbol combinations related to “Blue 7 Replay” or “Follow Replay” on the active line. Based on this, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 301 determines which one of the symbol combinations of “red 7 replay”, “blue 7 replay”, or “follow replay” Based on what is displayed on the activated line, control is performed to shift the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the RT3 gaming state, the main CPU 301 changes the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming based on the fact that one of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Control to shift to the state.

  In the following, the RT0 gaming state may be described as “non-RT gaming state” or “general gaming state”, and the RT1 gaming state to RT3 gaming state may be collectively referred to as “RT gaming state”. .

(Status management table)
Next, the state management table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The state management table is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for the sub CPU 402 to recognize the current state. Specifically, the state management table defines the state name and the number corresponding to each state name. In the state management table in the present embodiment, the “normal state” with the state number “01”, the state A “ART ready state” having a number “02” and an “ART state” having a state number “03” are defined. In this embodiment, the state management table is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state management table may not be provided. When the state management table is not provided, the sub CPU 402 performs control to update the state number based on a program stored in the sub ROM 404 when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(State transition diagram)
Next, a state transition diagram will be described based on FIG.

  The state transition diagram includes (a) a state managed by the sub-control board 400, (b) a condition for shifting a state managed by the sub-control board 400, and (c) managed by the sub-control board 400. When the condition for the state transition is satisfied, the state of the transition destination of the state managed by the sub control board 400 is defined. Specifically, in the normal state, the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 being “0” is the normal state. To the ART ready state. Also, in the normal state, the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “04”, and the information included in the display determination command is the symbol related to the blue 7 replay or follow replay. When the combination is information indicating that the combination is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the normal state to the ART state.

  Similarly, in the ART ready state, when the information included in the display determination command is information indicating that a combination of symbols related to red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed on the active line, The state managed by the sub control board 400 is shifted from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, in the ART state, the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”, the value of the difference counter is “0” or less, and the information included in the display determination command is blank. When the symbol combination is information indicating that the symbol combination is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the ART state to the normal state.

  The ART state includes a first ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, and an ART state until the value stored in the difference counter becomes “0” or less. The second ART state in which the game can be performed is included. In the present embodiment, in the first ART state, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the first ART state to the second ART state based on the value of the game number counter being “0”. .

  The state transition diagram defines the correspondence between the state managed by the sub control board 400 and the gaming state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is in principle the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. Similarly, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART ready state, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is in principle the RT2 gaming state, and the state managed by the sub control board 400 is ART. In the case of the state, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is in principle the RT3 gaming state.

  As an exception, even if the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 may not be the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state. For example, when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the normal state and the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the RT1 gaming state, the winning area “05” is set by the internal lottery process described later. When the game is determined and the player operates in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13, the combination of symbols related to the preparation replay is displayed on the active line, and the game managed by the main control board 300 The state becomes the RT2 gaming state, but the state managed by the sub-control board 400 remains in the normal state.

  Further, as an exception when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART ready state, for example, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART ready state and is managed by the main control board 300. When the gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the winning area “10” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the player operates the left stop button 11 first, and the combination of symbols related to the blank is displayed on the active line. Then, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 becomes the RT1 gaming state, but the state managed by the sub control board 400 remains in the ART ready state.

  Further, as an exception when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, for example, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, and the value of the ART game number counter is not “0”. When the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is the RT3 gaming state, the winning area “10” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, and the left stop button 11 is first operated by the player, When the combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 becomes the RT1 gaming state, but the state managed by the sub-control board 400 remains in the ART state.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404 and is provided for determining the effects to be performed in each state. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub CPU 402 are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is a normal state, and (b) a state managed by the sub CPU 402. There are provided an ART preparation state effect determination table used in the case of the ART preparation state, and (c) an ART state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub CPU 402 is in the ART state.

(ART ready state transition game number determination table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART ready state transition game number determination table is provided in the sub-ROM 404, and is provided for determining the number of games until the state shifts to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the ART ready state transition game number determination table defines the range of the number of games until the transition to the ART ready state and the lottery value.

  Here, the lottery value in the ART ready state transition game number determination table is provided for each set value, and the lottery value defined for each range of the number of games differs for each set value. In particular, in the present embodiment, the lottery value in the ART ready state transition game number determination table is defined such that the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the sub CPU 402 determines the range of the faster game number. As a result, the ratio of the sub CPU 402 that determines the short number of games as the number of games for shifting to the ART ready state increases.

(ART preparation status distribution table)
Next, the ART preparation state distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

The ART ready state distribution table is provided in the sub ROM 404. Further, the ART preparation state distribution table defines the state to be shifted to among the ART preparation states A to C and the lottery values corresponding to each ART preparation state.
In the present embodiment, the lottery values defined in the ART ready state distribution table are provided for each set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the probability of shifting to the ART ready state C. Has been.

(ART preparation state A)
The ART preparation state A is a state having the least advantageous degree among the ART preparation state A, the ART preparation state B, and the ART preparation state C. Further, in the ART preparation state A, when the received reel rotation start acceptance command has information on winning areas “01” to “03” (“ART entry replay 01” to “ART entry replay 03”), Control for informing the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like so that the "BAR1" symbol is aligned with any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line.

(ART preparation state B)
The ART preparation state B is a state in which the degree of advantage is higher than that in the ART preparation state A and the degree of advantage is lower than that in the ART preparation state C. Further, in the ART preparation state B, when the received reel rotation start acceptance command has information on winning areas “01” to “03” (“ART entry replay 01” to “ART entry replay 03”), In addition, control is performed to notify the stop operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 so that the “red 7” symbol is aligned with any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line.
(ART preparation state C)
The ART preparation state C is a state having the highest advantageous degree among the ART preparation state A, the ART preparation state B, and the ART preparation state C. Further, in the ART preparation state C, when the received reel rotation start acceptance command has information on winning areas “01” to “03” (“ART entry replay 01” to “ART entry replay 03”), Control for informing the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like so that the "blue 7" symbol is aligned with any of the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, the right-up line, or the right-down line.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 404, and after the lottery based on the ART preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 19) is determined to shift to the ART preparation state A or the ART preparation state B, It is provided for performing a lottery to shift to the ART preparation state B or ART preparation state C before shifting to the ART state.

  Specifically, the promotion lottery table is (a) an ART lottery table for an ART preparation state A used when performing an promotion lottery in the ART preparation state A, and (b) an promotion lottery in the ART preparation state B. An ART preparation state B promotion lottery table used at the time is provided, and in each promotion lottery table, a lottery value for each winning area and a transfer destination ART preparation state are defined. For example, in the ART preparation state A, when “strong cherry” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery to shift to the ART preparation state B at “32768/65536”.

(Additional game number determination table)
Next, the added game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404. In addition, the added game number determination table is based on the first ART state based on the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) received from the main control board 300 by the sub control board 400 and the random value R3. It is provided for determining the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played.

  For example, when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command described later received from the main control board 300 is information related to “common bell”, the sub CPU 402 has a probability of “4587/65536”. , “10” game is determined as the number of additional games, “20” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “2244/65536”, and “30” is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “678/65536”. A game is determined, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with a probability of “154/65536”, and “100” games are determined as the number of additional games with a probability of “9/65536”. On the other hand, if the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) received from the main control board 300 is information related to the “common bell”, the number of added games with the probability of “57864/65536” As a result, the “0” game is determined. In this case, the number of games that can be played in the first ART state is not added.

(Additional difference number determination table)
Next, the extra difference number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The extra difference number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 404. Further, the additional difference number determination table is stored in the second ART state based on the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) received from the main control board 300 and the random value R3. It is provided to determine the difference number to be added to the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the game.

  For example, when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command described later received from the main control board 300 is information related to “common bell”, the sub CPU 402 has a probability of “4587/65536”. “20” is determined as the additional difference number, “30” is determined as the additional difference number with a probability of “2244/65536”, and “50” is determined as the additional difference number with the probability of “678/65536”. A lottery is performed to determine “80” as an additional difference number with a probability of “154/65536” and to determine “150” as an additional difference number with a probability of “9/65536”. On the other hand, when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command (described later) received from the main control board 300 is information related to the “common bell”, the number of additional difference sheets with the probability of “57864/65536” “0” is determined. In this case, the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state is not added.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the program start process is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1 is set, and a process of setting the register address is performed based on the table. Then, when the process of step S1 ends, the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change switch is ON. Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change switch 37sw is turned on by rotating a predetermined angle while a setting changing key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole. Therefore, in step S2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the key is inserted into the keyhole. If it is determined that the setting change switch is ON (step S2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S3. If it is determined that the setting change switch is OFF (step S2 = No) ), The process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a setting change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 switches the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 37 by the setting change switch 37sw, or the start switch 10sw is a start lever. Based on the detection of the ten operations, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 36 is confirmed. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change command. Specifically, a process of setting a setting change command having information related to the setting value determined in step S 3 in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a power interruption recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays the saved register value and the saved stack pointer value when power supply is started after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off. Perform processing to restore. In the power interruption recovery process, an initialization process of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S5 is completed, the process proceeds to the main loop process of FIG.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a stack pointer and initializing the main RAM 303. Note that the process of step S101 is an initialization process performed for each game. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, a process for clearing the payout number and a process for setting the current gaming state are performed. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs an overflow display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 pays out via the relay board 200 based on the fact that the auxiliary storage unit full tank sensor 530s detects that a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530. A process of displaying a predetermined error by the number display 27 is performed. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of permitting the reception of medals when the re-game is not operating. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for checking whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S106 ends, the process proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning area by lottery. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, a process of setting a reel rotation start acceptance command having information related to the winning area determined in step S107 in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S108 ends, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum one game time. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data for rotating the reel 17 at a constant speed by driving the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel 17 based on the fact that the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detect a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. . Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 detects information regarding the type of the reel 17 that has stopped, and the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw detected a stop operation on the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player with respect to the sub-control board 400. In order to transmit the reel stop command having the information related to the symbol position at the time of the operation and the information related to the symbol code corresponding to the symbol position, a process of setting the reel stop command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Do. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have been stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not all of the reels 17 rotated by the reel rotation start process in step S110 have been stopped by operating the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13. If it is determined that all reels have been stopped (step S113 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114, and if it is determined that any reel has not been stopped (step S113 =). No), the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 520 via the power supply substrate 500. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly executed.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 25, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S106 of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever check processing.

(Step S106-1)
In step S106-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the value of the medal insertion number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, or (b) the re-game in-operation flag provided in the main RAM 303. When the re-game in-operation flag in the storage area is ON, processing is performed to determine whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S106-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S106-2, and if it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S106). -1 = No), the process of step S106-1 is repeatedly executed until the start switch is turned on.

(Step S106-2)
In step S106-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the re-game in-operation flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S106-2 is completed, the start lever check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process. Then, when the process of step S106-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S106-3.

(Step S106-3)
In step S106-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a BET number command. More specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits a BET number command having information related to the BET number specified when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw to the sub control board 400. The BET number command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. In the present embodiment, the BET number included in the BET number command is “3”. When the process of step S106-3 is completed, the start lever check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S107 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a subroutine of internal lottery processing.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting a random number value generated by the random number generator 304. Here, when the main CPU 301 extracts the random number value generated by the random number generator 304, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing it in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-2.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-3.

(Step S107-3)
In step S107-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring the number of lotteries based on the gaming state acquired by the process of step S107-2. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 acquires “24” as the number of lotteries regardless of the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and is provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the lottery count storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-4.

(Step S107-4)
In step S107-4, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a lottery value in the winning area corresponding to the current number of lotteries. For example, when the set value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “24”, a process of acquiring the random value “369” related to “special role 02” is performed. When the set value is “1” and the number of lotteries is “23”, a process of acquiring a random value “600” related to “special role 01” is performed. Then, when the process of step S107-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-5.

(Step S107-5)
In step S107-5, the main CPU 301 performs calculation update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 corresponds to the current number of lotteries acquired by the processing of step S107-4 from the random number value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process of subtracting the lottery value of the winning area to be performed is performed, and the process of updating the value of the random number stored in the winning area determining random value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the value obtained by the subtraction is performed. . Then, when the process of step S107-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-6.

(Step S107-6)
In step S <b> 107-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the winning area determination random value storage area of the main RAM 303 is a negative value. And when it determines with having been won (step S107-6 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S107-7. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S107-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-8.

(Step S107-7)
In step S107-7, the main CPU 301 performs data storage processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the winning area determined to be won in the process of step S107-6 in a winning area storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-7 is completed, the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Step S107-8)
In step S107-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S107-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S107-9.

(Step S107-9)
In step S107-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value stored in the lottery count storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S107-8, so that the value of the lottery count storage area is A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S107-9 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0” (step S107-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S107-4.

  In this embodiment, when the number of lotteries is “0” (step S107-9 = YES), “00” “losing” is determined as the winning area.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, based on FIG. 27, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 27 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the minimum one game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S109-2 described later has become “0” in the previous game. When it is determined that the minimum one game time has elapsed (step S109-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-2, and when it is determined that the minimum one game time has not elapsed. (Step S109-1 = No), the process of Step S109-1 is repeatedly executed until the minimum one game time elapses.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a minimum one game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 does not spend less than the minimum one game time from the process of step S109-2 in the current game to the process of step S109-2 in the next game in order to suppress gambling for the game. As described above, a process of setting the minimum one game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum one game time is about 4.1 seconds. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a constant speed rotation waiting time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a waiting time until the rotation speed of the reel 17 reaches a constant speed. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the reel 17 is started to the sub-control board 400, the reel rotation start command is sent to the effect of the main RAM 303. To set in the transmission data storage area. When the process of step S109-4 ends, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 28, the process during reel rotation performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel rotation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop switches 11sw, 12sw, and 13sw have detected the operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 by the player. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S111-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S111). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing reference position acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the pressing reference position based on the target reel 17 and the counter value of the pulses supplied to the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103, and is provided in the main RAM 303. A process of storing in the pressing reference position storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-3.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning area determined by the internal lottery process, the operation order of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13 and the like. To obtain the number of sliding frames. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of stopping the control reel based on the pressing reference position acquired by the process of step S111-2 and the number of sliding symbols acquired by the process of step S111-3. When the process in step S111-4 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S112 in the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 29, the display determination process performed by the process of step S114 of FIG. 24 is demonstrated. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S114-1)
In step S114-1, the main CPU 301 performs display determination error detection processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is not abnormal based on the winning area determined by the internal lottery process and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Judgment is made. Then, when the process of step S114-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-2.

(Step S114-2)
In step S114-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination error has been detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not an abnormality has been detected by the display determination error detection process of step S114-1. If it is determined that a display determination error has been detected (step S114-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114-3, and if it is determined that a display determination error has not been detected ( Step S114-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S114-5.

(Step S114-3)
In step S114-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination error command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a display determination error command having information related to the display determination error to the sub control board 400, the display determination error command is stored in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S114-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-4.

(Step S114-4)
In step S114-4, the main CPU 301 performs display error detection processing. Specifically, since the main CPU 301 determines that a display determination error has been detected in the process of step S114-2 (step S114-2 = Yes), the main CPU 301 enters a winning area that has not been determined by the internal lottery process. Since the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, a display determination error detection process is performed to make it impossible to recover from the error state. Then, when the process of step S114-4 is completed, the main CPU 301 ends the process without returning to the main loop process of FIG.

(Step S114-5)
In step S <b> 114-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not replay display is in progress. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the regame display is being performed (step S114-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114-6, and if it is determined that the regame display is not being performed (step S114). -5 = No), the process proceeds to step S114-7.

(Step S114-6)
In step S114-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the re-game in-operation flag in the re-game in-operation flag storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-9.

(Step S114-7)
In step S114-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to winning is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that a winning symbol is displayed (step S114-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S114-8, and when it is determined that a winning symbol is not displayed (step S114). −7 = No), the process proceeds to step S114-10.

(Step S114-8)
In step S114-8, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on a combination of symbols related to winnings displayed on the active line and a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7). Then, when the process of step S114-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-9.

(Step S114-9)
In step S114-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a payout number command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the payout number command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a payout number command having information related to the payout number to the sub-control board 400. I do. Then, when the process of step S114-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S114-10.

(Step S114-10)
In step S114-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a display determination command having information related to the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400, the display determination command is used for effects in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to set in the transmission data storage area. When the process of step S114-10 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S115 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 30, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S116 of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S116-1)
In step S116-1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT0 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is the RT0 gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game is in the RT0 gaming state (step S116-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-2, and if it is determined that the game is not in the RT0 gaming state (step S116-1). = No), the process proceeds to step S116-4.

(Step S116-2)
In step S116-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S116-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-3. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S116-2). = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-3)
In step S116-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-3 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-4)
In step S116-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the RT1 gaming state is set (step S116-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-5, and when it is determined that the RT1 gaming state is not set (step S116-4). = No), the process proceeds to step S116-9.

(Step S116-5)
In step S116-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a preparation replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to the preparation replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the preparation replay is displayed (step S116-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-6, and if it is determined that the preparation replay is not displayed (step S116). -5 = No), the process proceeds to step S116-7.

(Step S116-6)
In step S116-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT2 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-6 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-7)
In step S116-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the blue 7 replay or follow replay is displayed (step S116-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-8, and it is determined that the blue 7 replay or follow replay is not displayed. If it is determined (step S116-7 = No), the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-8)
In step S116-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-8 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-9)
In step S116-9, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the RT2 gaming state is set (step S116-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-10, and when it is determined that the RT2 gaming state is not set (step S116-9). = No), the process proceeds to step S116-14.

(Step S116-10)
In step S116-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S116-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-11. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S116-10). = No), the process proceeds to step S116-12.

(Step S116-11)
In step S116-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S116-11 ends, the gaming state transition process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-12)
In step S116-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether one of red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether any combination of symbols among red 7 replay, blue 7 replay and follow replay is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed (step S116-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-13, and the red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, Alternatively, if it is determined that the follow replay is not displayed (step S116-12 = No), the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-13)
In step S116-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT3 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-13 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-14)
In step S116-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a combination of symbols related to a blank is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S116-14 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116-15, and if it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S116-14). = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S116-15)
In step S116-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information relating to the RT1 gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S116-15 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, the interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving signals from the reel control board 100, the relay board 200, and the power supply board 500 through the I / F circuit 305. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum one game time or the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 via the reel control board 100, thereby performing acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, and the like of the reel 17. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of outputting a signal to the external concentration terminal board 38. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 controls the light emission of the start lamp 23, the BET lamp 24, the stored number display unit 25, the game state display lamp 26, the payout number display unit 27, the throw-in possible display lamp 28, and the re-game display lamp 29. I do. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG. The main process in the sub control board is a process performed based on the power switch 511sw being turned on.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 402 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 402 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 402 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of outputting sound from the speakers 34 and 35 via the amplifier control board 440 based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 402 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402, based on the effect content determined by the effect determination process described later, via the effect control board 410, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, and the start The lever effect lamp 42 is controlled. Further, the sub CPU 402 controls the effect device 44 via the effect control board 410 and the drive board 43 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 402 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 410 and the general-purpose board 45 based on the effect contents determined by the effect determination process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 402 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 detects (a) processing executed when the effect button detection switch 18sw detects the operation of the effect button 18, and (b) the cross key detection switch 19sw detects the operation of the cross key 19. The process to be executed when it is done. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, the main board communication process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not a different command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the previously transmitted command. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, since the command transmitted from the I / F circuit 305 of the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time, the sub CPU 402 is based on a command different from the command transmitted last time. Processing for creating game information and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 405 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a setting change command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a setting change command. If it is determined that the setting change command has been received (step S302-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2, and it is determined that the setting change command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for receiving a setting change command. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining the content of the effect at the time of setting change based on the information included in the received setting change command. With this processing, the sub CPU 402 determines an effect to display the image data indicating that the setting is being changed on the liquid crystal display device 46, or an effect to display the image data indicating that the setting change has been completed. Control. When the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not a reel rotation start acceptance command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel rotation start acceptance command. If it is determined that the reel rotation start acceptance command has been received (step S302-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4, and the reel rotation start acceptance command has not been received. Is determined (step S302-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the contents of effects based on the information included in the received reel rotation start acceptance command. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-5)
In step S302-3-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a reel rotation start command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel rotation start command. If it is determined that the reel rotation start command has been received (step S302-3-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-6, and it is determined that the reel rotation start command has not been received. If it is determined (step S302-3-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-7.

(Step S302-3-6)
In step S302-3-6, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start command reception process. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining the content of the effect at the start of reel rotation based on the information included in the received reel rotation start command. When the process of step S302-3-6 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-7)
In step S302-3-7, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a reel stop command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a reel stop command. If it is determined that the reel stop command has been received (step S302-3-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-8, and it is determined that the reel stop command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-9.

(Step S302-3-8)
In step S302-3-8, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel stop command reception process. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the content of the effect based on the information included in the received reel stop command. When the process of step S302-3-8 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-9)
In step S302-3-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether an error command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is an error command. When it is determined that an error command has been received (step S302-3-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-10, and when it is determined that no error command has been received. (Step S302-3-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S302-3-11.

  Here, the error command includes commands relating to various errors such as a display determination error command. For example, when the auxiliary storage unit full sensor 530s detects that more than a predetermined number of medals are stored in the auxiliary storage unit 530, an auxiliary storage unit error and a combination of symbols related to winning are displayed on the active line, Even when a hopper error occurs when there is no medal stored in the hopper 520 and the medal cannot be paid out, a selector error occurs when the medal sensor 16s cannot normally detect the passage of the medal, The main CPU 301 transmits each error command to the sub control board 400 via the I / F circuit 305.

(Step S302-3-10)
In step S302-3-10, the sub CPU 402 performs error command reception processing. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the production content based on the information included in the received error command. As a result of the processing, the sub CPU 402 determines the effect of displaying the image data indicating that the error has been detected on the liquid crystal display device 46 as the effect content, or the audio data output when the error is detected by the speakers 34,. The control which determines the production output from 35 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-10 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-11)
In step S302-3-11, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not a BET number command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a BET number command. If it is determined that the BET number command has been received (step S302-3-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12, and it is determined that the BET number command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-13.

(Step S302-3-12)
In step S302-3-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a BET number command reception process. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing the BET number based on the information included in the received BET number command. When the process of step S302-3-12 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-13)
In step S302-3-13, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a payout number command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a payout number command. If it is determined that a payout number command has been received (step S302-3-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14, and it is determined that a payout number command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-15.

(Step S302-3-14)
In step S302-3-14, the sub CPU 402 performs a payout number command reception process. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process to be executed when a medal is paid out based on the information included in the received payout number command. Details of the payout number command reception process will be described later. When the process of step S302-3-14 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-15)
In step S302-3-15, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2 is a display determination command. When it is determined that the display determination command has been received (step S302-3-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16, and it is determined that the display determination command has not been received. In this case (step S302-3-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-17.

(Step S302-3-16)
In step S302-3-16, the sub CPU 402 performs a display determination command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the contents of the effect when winning or the like is established based on the information included in the received display determination command. When the process of step S302-3-16 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-17)
In step S302-3-17, the sub CPU 402 performs control to execute processing according to the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the content of the effect based on the command stored by the game information storage process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3-17 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Reel rotation start acceptance command reception processing)
Next, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of receiving a reel rotation start acceptance command.

(Step S302-3-4-1)
In step S302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “01” based on a value stored in a state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2, and the state number is “01”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-3.

(Step S302-3-4-2)
In step S302-3-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs normal state processing. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter. When the process of step S302-3-4-2 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-4-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “02” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4, and the state number is “01”. If it is determined that it is not (step S302-3-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5.

(Step S302-3-4-4)
In step S302-3-4-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state process. In the processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing related to the promotion lottery based on the promotion lottery table (see FIG. 20) in the ART preparation state A or the ART preparation state B. When the process of step S302-3-4-4 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-4-5)
In step S302-3-4-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process related to the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. When the process of step S302-3-4-5 ends, the reel rotation start acceptance command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Normal processing)
Next, the normal state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-4-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-2-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2-2.

(Step S302-3-4-2-2)
In step S302-3-4-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter is “0”. Specifically, as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter by the process of step S302-3-2-1, the sub CPU 402 sets the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter to “0”. Processing for determining whether or not If it is determined that the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-4-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2-2-3. When the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-4-2-2 = No), step S302-3-4-2-2 The processing is shifted to 6.

(Step S302-3-4-2-2-3)
In step S302-3-4-2-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “02” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “02”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-2-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2-2-4.

(Step S302-3-4-2-2-4)
In step S302-3-4-2-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 selects one of the ART preparation state A, the ART preparation state B, and the ART preparation state C based on the ART preparation state distribution table (see FIG. 19) provided in the sub ROM 404. The process of determining is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-2-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2-5.

(Step S302-3-4-2-5)
In step S302-3-4-2-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 stores information related to any of the ART preparation state A, the ART preparation state B, and the ART preparation state C determined by the process of step S302-3-4-2-2-4. A process of storing in an ART preparation state storage area provided in the RAM 405 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-2-2-6.

(Step S302-3-4-2-6)
In step S302-3-4-2-6, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses the normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 17A) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-2-6 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, the ART preparation state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-4-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART preparation state A is in effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART preparation state A is based on a value stored in an ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state is the ART preparation state A (step S302-3-4-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-2, and the ART preparation state A If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-4-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-5.

(Step S302-3-4-4-2)
In step S302-3-4-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the ART preparation state A promotion lottery table (see FIG. 20A) and information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command. . Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-4-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-3.

(Step S302-3-4-4-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-4-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state B or the ART preparation state C. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state B or the ART preparation state C as a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-4-4-3. Perform the process. If it is determined that the transition to the ART preparation state B or the ART preparation state C is determined (step S302-3-4-4-3 = Yes), step S302-3-4-4- 4, when it is determined that it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state B or ART preparation state C (step S302-3-4-4-3 = No), step S302 The process proceeds to -3--4-4-9.

(Step S302-3-4-4-4)
In step S302-3-4-4-4, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 changes the value stored in the ART ready state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 by the lottery determined by the lottery process of promotion in step S302-3-4-4-2. A process of updating information related to the previous ART preparation state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-9.

(Step S302-3-4-4-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-4-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART preparation state B is set. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART preparation state B is based on the value stored in the ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state is the ART preparation state B (step S302-3-4-4-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-6, and the ART preparation state B is determined. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-4-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-9.

(Step S302-3-4-4-6)
In step S302-3-4-4-6, the sub CPU 402 performs promotion lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs the promotion lottery based on the ART preparation state B promotion lottery table (see FIG. 20B) and information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command. . Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-7.

(Step S302-3-4-4-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-4-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state C is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state C as a result of the lottery by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-4-4-6. If it is determined that it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state C (step S302-3-4-4-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-8. If it is determined that the transition to the ART preparation state C has not been determined (step S302-3-4-4-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-9. To do.

(Step S302-3-4-4-8)
In step S302-3-4-4-8, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state update process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 changes the value stored in the ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 by the lottery determined by the promotion lottery process in step S302-3-4-4-6. A process of updating information related to the previous ART preparation state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-9.

(Step S302-3-4-4-9)
In step S302-3-4-4-9, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 includes an ART preparation state effect determination table (see FIG. 17B) provided in the sub ROM 404, and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on the above, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-4-9 ends, the ART preparation state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 shows a subroutine for the ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-1, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3--4-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-3. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-4-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2.

(Step S302-3-4-5-2)
In step S302-3--4-5-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance first ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process and the like on the number of games. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-2 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-4-5-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-3, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is “0” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the difference number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is not equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-4-5-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-4. If it is determined that the value of the difference sheet counter is equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-4-5-3 = Yes), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the sub control board main The process proceeds to step S303 of the process.

(Step S302-3-4-5-4)
In step S302-3-4-5-4, the sub CPU 402 performs reel rotation start acceptance second ART state processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process or the like by adding the difference number. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-4 is completed, the subroutine for the ART state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process for the first ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance)
Next, the processing for the first ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted.

(Step S302-3-4-5-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-5-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process for adding the number of games, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random number value R3, and performs an additional lottery on the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random value R3. Then, when the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-2.

(Step S302-3-4-5-2-2)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-2 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Second ART state process when reel rotation start is accepted)
Next, the processing for the second ART state at the time of accepting the reel rotation start will be described based on FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted.

(Step S302-3--4-5-4-1)
In step S302-3--4-5-4-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a difference number addition lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3, and adds the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state based on the addition difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3. Make a lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3--4-5-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-4-2.

(Step S302-3--4-5-4-2)
In step S302-3--4-5-4-2, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-4-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Number of games added lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the game number addition lottery process will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of lottery processing for adding the number of games.

(Step S302-3--4-5-2-1-1)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random number value R3, and performs an additional lottery on the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random number value R3. . Then, when the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-1-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-1-2.

(Step S302-3--4-5-2-1-2)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is won by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game number addition lottery is won as a result of the lottery process by the game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-2-1-1-1. . Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of games, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games of “10” or more as the added number of games when the “0” game is not determined as the added number of games. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the number of games. If it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the number of games (step S302-3--4-5-2-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-1-3. If it is determined that the number of games is not selected for the lottery (step S302-3--4-5-2-1-2 = No), the number of games added lottery processing subroutine is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to S302-3--4-5-2-2 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance.

(Step S302-3--4-5-2-1-3)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games added in the lottery process in step S302-3--4-5-2-1 to the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Performs processing to add values. When the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-1-3 is completed, the number-of-games additional lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is received at S302-3-4. The process proceeds to 5-2-2.

(Draw lottery process with difference number)
Next, the difference number addition lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the lottery process for adding the difference number.

(Step S302-3--4-5-4-1-1)
In step S302-3--4-5-4-1-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3, and based on the added difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3, the number of difference numbers that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state. Add lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3--4-5-4-1-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-4-1-2.

(Step S302-3--4-5-4-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-4-1-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the lottery is won by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the difference number addition lottery is won as a result of the lottery processing by the difference number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-4-1-1. . Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the difference number, the sub CPU 402 has determined “0” as the additional difference number, that is, determined the difference number of “20” or more as the additional difference number. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the difference number. If it is determined that the lottery with the difference number is won (step S302-3--4-5-4-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-4-1-3. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the difference number addition lottery is not won (step S302-3--4-5-4-1-2 = No), the difference number addition lottery processing subroutine is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to S302-3--4-5-4-2 of the second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance.

(Step S302-3--4-5-4-1-3)
In step S302-3--4-5-4-1-3, the sub CPU 402 performs difference sheet counter addition processing. More specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the difference number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 to the difference number added in the step S302-3--4-5-4-1-1, and the added difference number selected in the lottery process. Performs processing to add values. When the process of step S302-3--4-5-4-1-3 ends, the difference number addition lottery process subroutine ends, and the reel rotation start acceptance second ART state process S302-3-4 is completed. The process proceeds to 5-4-2.

(Process when payout number command is received)
Next, the process at the time of receiving the payout number command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a payout number command is received.

(Step S302-3-14-1)
In step S302-3-14-1, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not it is in the ART gaming state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “03” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “03” (step S302-3-14-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-2, and the state number is “03”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-14-1 = No), the subroutine of the payout number command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-2)
In step S302-3-14-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-14-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-12-4, and the game number counter When it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S302-3-14-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-3.

(Step S302-3-14-3)
In step S302-3-14-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-14-3 is completed, the subroutine for the payout number command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-4)
In step S302-3-14-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a calculation process of the acquired difference number in the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the value of the payout number of the game from the payout number command, subtracts the value of the BET number stored when the BET number command is received from the value of the payout number, and acquires the game Calculate the difference value. When the display combination is “replay”, the payout number is “0”, but “3” is automatically added and the BET value is subtracted (0 + 3-3 = 0). The value of the acquired difference number is calculated as “0”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-5.

(Step S302-3-14-5)
In step S302-3-14-5, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game acquisition difference number is greater than “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game difference difference number calculated by the calculation process of the acquisition difference number in step S302-3-14-4 is a positive value. Do. And when it determines with the value of the said game acquisition difference sheet number being a positive value (step S302-3-14-5 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-14-6, the said When it is determined that the value of the game acquisition difference number is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-5 = No), the payout number command reception process subroutine is terminated, and the main process in the sub control board is completed. The process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S302-3-14-6)
In step S302-3-14-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts the value of the game acquisition difference number calculated by the acquisition difference number calculation process in step S302-3-14-4 from the value of the difference number counter, thereby obtaining the difference number. Update the counter value. When the process of step S302-3-14-6 is completed, the subroutine of the payout number command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, the display determination command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-16-1)
In step S302-3-16-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether a red 7 replay, a blue 7 replay, or a follow replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines that the combination of symbols related to the red 7 replay, the blue 7 replay, or the follow replay is on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storing process in step S302. A process of determining whether or not it is displayed is performed. If it is determined that red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed (step S302-3-16-1 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2, and red is displayed. When it is determined that 7 replay, blue 7 replay, and follow replay are not displayed (step S302-3-16-1 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-3.

(Step S302-3-16-2)
In step S302-3-16-2, the sub CPU 402 performs red / blue 7 / follow replay display processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 based on the value stored in the ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5.

(Step S302-3-16-3)
In step S302-3-16-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the combination of symbols related to the blank has been displayed on the active line based on the information related to the display determination command stored by the game information storage processing in step S302. I do. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-16-3 = YES), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-4, and it is determined that no blank is displayed. In this case (step S302-3-16-3 = NO), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5.

(Step S302-3-16-4)
In step S302-3-16-4, the sub CPU 402 performs blank display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the number of games for shifting to the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5.

(Step S302-3-16-5)
In step S302-3-16-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines the content of the effect based on the effect determined when the reel rotation start acceptance command is received, the stop operation position of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13, the stop operation order, and the like. I do. When the process of step S302-3-16-5 ends, the subroutine of the display determination command reception process ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Red 7 / Blue 7 / Follow replay display process)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display process will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing.

(Step S302-3-16-2-1)
In step S302-3-16-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “01”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “01” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “01” (step S302-3-16-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-2, and the state number Is determined not to be “01” (step S302-3-16-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-5.

(Step S302-3-16-2-2)
In step S302-3-16-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning area is “04”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the winning area is “04” based on the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command stored by the game information storing process of step S302. Perform the process. If it is determined that the winning area is “04” (step S302-3-16-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-3, and the winning area is determined. Is determined not to be “04” (step S302-3-16-2-2 = No), the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated and the display determination command is received. The process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5 of the process.

(Step S302-3-16-2-3)
In step S302-3-16-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-4.

(Step S302-3-16-2-4)
In step S302-3-16-2-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “300” as the value of the game number counter and setting “300” as the value of the difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “300” as the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and setting “300” as the value of the difference number counter. When the processing of step S302-3-16-2-4 is completed, the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and step S302-3-16-5 of the display determination command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-16-2-5)
In step S302-3-16-2-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number is “02”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the state number “02” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “02” (step S302-3-16-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-6, and the state number Is determined not to be “02” (step S302-3-16-2-5 = No), the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and display determination command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5.

(Step S302-3-16-2-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-16-2-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the ART preparation state A. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART preparation state A is based on a value stored in an ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state is the ART preparation state A (step S302-3-16-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-7, and the ART preparation state A is determined. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-16-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-9.

(Step S302-3-16-2-7)
In step S302-3-16-2-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-8.

(Step S302-3-16-2-8)
In step S302-3-16-2-8, the sub CPU 402 performs processing of setting “50” as the value of the game number counter and setting “50” as the value of the difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “50” as the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and setting “50” as the value of the difference number counter. When the processing of step S302-3-16-2-8 is completed, the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and step S302-3-16-5 of the display determination command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-16-2-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-16-2-9, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the ART preparation state B. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART preparation state B is based on the value stored in the ART preparation state storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state is the ART preparation state B (step S302-3-16-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-10, and the ART preparation state B is reached. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-16-2-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-12.

(Step S302-3-16-2-10)
In step S302-3-16-2-10, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-11.

(Step S302-3-16-2-11)
In step S302-3-16-2-11, the sub CPU 402 performs processing of setting “100” as the value of the game number counter and setting “100” as the value of the difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “100” as the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and setting “100” as the value of the difference number counter. When the processing of step S302-3-16-2-11 is completed, the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and step S302-3-16-5 of the display determination command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-16-2-12)
In step S302-3-16-2-12, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “03” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “03”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-2-13.

(Step S302-3-16-2-13)
In step S302-3-16-2-13, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “200” as the value of the game number counter and setting “200” as the value of the difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “200” as the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and setting “200” as the value of the difference number counter. When the processing of step S302-3-16-2-13 is completed, the subroutine for red 7 / blue 7 / follow replay display processing is terminated, and step S302-3-16-5 of the display determination command reception processing is completed. The process is transferred to.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of games in the initial state of the ART state based on the value stored in the state number storage area of the sub RAM 405 and the value stored in the ART preparation state storage area. Although the example in which the values set in the counter and the difference sheet counter are set in advance is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the values of the game number counter and the difference number counter in the initial state of the ART state may be determined by lottery.

(Blank display processing)
Next, a blank display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 shows a subroutine for blank display processing.

(Step S302-3-16-3-1)
In step S302-3-16-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number is “03”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the state number “03” is stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “03” (step S302-3-16-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-3-2, and the state number is set. Is determined not to be “03” (step S302-3-16-3-1 = No), the blank display time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time processing step S302-3-16 is completed. The process is shifted to -5.

(Step S302-3-16-3-2)
In step S302-3-16-3-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-16-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-3-3. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-16-3-2 = No), the blank display time processing subroutine is terminated, and the display determination command reception time processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5.

(Step S302-3-16-3-3)
In step S302-3-16-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the difference number counter is “0” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the difference sheet counter is equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-16-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-3-4. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is not equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-16-3-3 = No), the blank display processing subroutine is terminated and the display determination command is received. The process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5 of the process.

(Step S302-3-16-3-4)
In step S302-3-16-3-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting “01” as the state number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to update the value of the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 to “01”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-16-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-3-5.

(Step S302-3-16-3-5)
In step S302-3-16-3-5, the sub CPU 402 performs an ART preparation state transition game number determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines and determines the range of the number of games until the transition to the ART preparation state based on the ART preparation state transition game number determination table (see FIG. 18) provided in the sub ROM 404. Within the range of the number of games played, control is performed to determine the number of games until the transition to the ART ready state by lottery. Then, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for storing the number of games until the determined ART preparation state is shifted to the ART preparation state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-16-3-5 is completed, the subroutine for blank display processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-16-5 of display determination command reception processing.

(About the ART state time chart)
Next, an ART state time chart will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the following description, unit information and numerical information about the first ART state out of unit information and numerical information will be collectively referred to as “information relating to the first ART state”. Furthermore, among unit information and numerical information, unit information and numerical information regarding the second ART state will be collectively referred to as “information relating to the second ART state”. Further, the unit information and numerical information regarding the number of added games will be collectively referred to as “information relating to the number of added games”. Furthermore, unit information and numerical information regarding the additional difference number will be collectively referred to as “information relating to the additional difference number”.

  FIG. 68 shows a first ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the number of games of 100 games is consumed, and a second ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the number of medals to be paid out reaches 100. 7 is a time chart showing an example of transition of the game state when a game in the ART state including is performed. FIG. 68 shows a time chart when the ART preparation state B is shifted to the ART state.

  In the present embodiment, when a game in the ART state including both the first ART state and the second ART state is performed, the game is first performed in the first ART state. In the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state is notified. Note that, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the second ART state is not notified and is temporarily concealed (see (1-1) in FIG. 68).

  In a game in the first ART state, a lottery is executed by adding the number of games. As a result of the lottery drawing for the number of games, when the number of games is won, information on the number of additional games is notified (see (1-2) in FIG. 68).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the game in the first ART state is finished and the game in the second ART state is started. In the initial state of the second ART state, information related to the second ART state that has been kept secret in the game in the first ART state is notified (see (1-3) in FIG. 68).

  In the game in the second ART state, the lottery is executed by adding the difference number. As a result of the difference number addition lottery, when the difference number addition is won, information on the addition difference number is notified (see (1-4) in FIG. 68).

  As described above, the gaming machine in the present embodiment conceals the numerical information and the unit information in the second ART state in the game in the first ART state, and at the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0”. The state numerical information and unit information are notified.

(Image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state)
Next, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timings (1-1), (1-2), (1-3), and (1-4) in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the display area 600 over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 46 is provided with a push order display area 610, a first display area 620, a second display area 630, and an initial state display area 640. . The first display area 620 includes a remaining game number display area 622 for displaying the number of remaining games that can be played in the first ART state, and a digested game number display area 624 for displaying the number of games digested in the first ART state. Is provided. In addition, the second display area 630 is provided with a remaining difference number display area 632 for displaying the remaining difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state.

  In the ART state including the first ART state and the second ART state, as shown in FIG. 69, various types of information related to the first ART state and the second ART state are notified. Further, in the ART state, the sub CPU 402 performs the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 11, 12, and 13 based on the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command stored by the game information storage process in step S <b> 302. Is displayed in the order display area 610.

  For example, when the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command stored in the game information storage process in step S302 is “12”, the sub CPU 402 aligns the combinations of symbols related to the bell on the active line. Control for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 46 the order of the stop operation of the stop buttons 11, 12, 13. In this case, the player first operates the middle stop button 12, then operates the left stop button 11, and finally operates the right stop button 13, so that the combination of symbols related to the bell is placed on the active line. Can be displayed.

  FIG. 69A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (1-1) of FIG. In the initial state of the first ART state, numerical information and unit information of the first ART state are displayed in the first display area 620 and the initial state display area 640. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), in the remaining game number display area 622, "100" is displayed as numerical information relating to the remaining number of games in the first ART state, and the remaining number of games in the first ART state is displayed. As such unit information, a letter “G” (game) can be displayed. Also, in the initial state display area 640, “100” is displayed as numerical information relating to the number of games in the initial state of the first ART state, and “G” is displayed as unit information relating to the number of games in the initial state of the first ART state. "Or the like can be displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 69A, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the second ART state is not displayed in the second display area 630.

  FIG. 69B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (1-2) of FIG. That is, as a result of the number-of-games lottery in the first ART state, when the number-of-games is won, an image as shown in FIG. 69B can be displayed. The image shown in FIG. 69B is an example of an image that is displayed when 300 games are added as a result of the lottery determination. If the winning of 300 games is won, the characters of the numerical information “300” relating to the number of added games and the characters of unit information “G” (game) relating to the number of added games can be displayed. That is, when the number of games is won in the first ART state, both numerical information and unit information of the number of games added in the game are notified.

  FIG. 69C is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (1-3) in FIG. That is, FIG. 69C shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of transition from the first ART state to the second ART state. As shown in FIG. 69 (c), in the remaining difference number display area 632 of the second display area 630, a display for informing that the remaining difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state is “100”. Can do. More specifically, in the remaining difference number display area 632, characters “100” are displayed as numerical information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state, and “unit information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state is displayed as“ "Sheet" can be displayed. Further, the initial state display area 640 can be displayed to notify that the difference sheet number in the initial state of the second ART state is “100 sheets”. More specifically, in the initial state display area 640, the character “100” is displayed as numerical information relating to the difference number in the initial state of the second ART state, and the unit relating to the difference number in the initial state of the second ART state is displayed. The information “sheet” can be displayed as information.

  FIG. 69D shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (1-4) in FIG. That is, in the second ART state, when the difference number is added and the result of the lottery is that the difference number is added, an image as shown in FIG. 69 (d) can be displayed. FIG. 69D shows an example of an image that is displayed when 100 extra sheets are won in the difference sheet extra lottery. As a result of the lottery for adding the number of difference sheets, when 100 sheets for the number of difference sheets are selected, the character of the numerical information “100” related to the number of added difference sheets and the unit information “sheet” related to the added difference number are displayed in the approximate center of the display area 600. Characters can be displayed. That is, in the second ART state, when winning the difference number extra lottery, the numerical information and unit information of the added difference number are notified in the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game in the first ART state, the numerical information and unit information in the second ART state are temporarily concealed, and the numerical information and unit information in the second ART state at the timing of the initial state of the second ART state. Is to be notified. In addition, the timing which alert | reports the numerical information and unit information of a 2nd ART state is not limited to this. That is, it is possible to appropriately select the notification timing, assuming that numerical information and unit information in the second ART state are notified in accordance with the transition to the second ART state. For example, numerical information and unit information in the second ART state may be notified after a predetermined number of games have been consumed since the start of the game in the second ART state.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Next, a second embodiment according to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is capable of executing both the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery in the game in the first ART state. In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing both the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery in the game in the second ART state. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment once conceals the unit information regarding the number of added games and the added difference number when the number of games is added or the difference number is added, and as a result of the lottery, the game number 1 is added. It is possible. In the following description, detailed description of the same configuration and processing as those of the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  The random number generator 403 of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment generates a random number value R4 in addition to the random number values R2 and R3. Note that the random value R4 is a random number for determining which of the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery is executed in the first ART state and the second ART state.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is provided with an addition unit determination lottery table (not shown) in addition to each table provided in the sub ROM 404 in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a unit for storing (e) the number of games related to the number of added games to be concealed, in addition to the respective areas provided in the sub RAM 405 according to the first embodiment. A secret game number counter, (f) a unit secret difference number counter for storing a difference number related to the additional difference number that is to be concealed, and (g) a game number or difference number related to the additional game number or the additional difference number is concealed. A unit secrecy flag storage area for storing information indicating whether or not the target is a target, and (h) a first ART flag storage area for storing information regarding whether or not the current ART state is the first ART state are provided. ing.

(State transition diagram)
Next, a state transition diagram according to the second embodiment will be described based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has the value of the ART ready state transition game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 in the normal state as in the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment. The state managed by the sub control board 400 is shifted from the normal state to the ART ready state. Also, in the normal state, the information related to the winning area included in the reel rotation start acceptance command is “04”, and the information included in the display determination command is the symbol related to the blue 7 replay or follow replay. When the combination is information indicating that the combination is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the normal state to the ART state.

  Similarly, in the ART ready state, when the information included in the display determination command is information indicating that a combination of symbols related to red 7 replay, blue 7 replay, or follow replay is displayed on the active line, The state managed by the sub control board 400 is shifted from the ART preparation state to the ART state. Further, in the ART state, the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”, the value of the difference counter is “0” or less, and the information included in the display determination command is blank. When the symbol combination is information indicating that the symbol combination is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the ART state to the normal state.

  As described in the description of the first embodiment, the ART state of the gaming machine 1 of the present invention is different from the first ART state in which the game in the ART state is possible until the value of the game number counter becomes “0”. A second ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the value stored in the number counter becomes “0” or less is included. In the present embodiment, in the first ART state, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the first ART state to the second ART state based on the value of the game number counter being “0”. . In the second ART state, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the second ART state to the first ART state based on the value of the difference counter being “0” or less.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process executed by the sub CPU 402 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-21)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-21, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART state is in the initial state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not it is an initial state in the ART state. If it is determined that the ART state is the initial state (step S302-3-4-5-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-22, and the ART state is changed. If it is determined that the current state is not the initial state (step S302-3-4-5-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-23.

(Step S302-3-4-5-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-22, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the first ART flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-23.

(Step S302-3-4-5-23)
In step S302-3-4-5-23, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the first ART flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-23 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to -24 and it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is not “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-23 = No), step S302 is performed. The process proceeds to -3-4-5-25.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24)
In step S302-3-4-5-24, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance first ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25)
In step S302-3-4-5-25, the sub CPU 402 performs a second ART state process at the time of accepting reel rotation start, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-25 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process for the first ART state)
Next, the processing for the first ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment can execute both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery in both the first ART state and the second ART state. In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment first notifies the numerical information about the number of added games and the added difference number as a result of the extra lottery and the difference number extra lottery, and the unit information in the first ART state or the first Notification is given when the 2ART state ends.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-1)
In step S302-3-4-4-24-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state of the first ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not it is an initial state of the first ART state. And when it determines with it being the initial state of a 1st ART state (step S302-3-4-2-54-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-4-5-24-2. If it is determined that the initial state is not the first ART state (step S302-3-4-4-24-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7. To do.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the unit concealment flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-3, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R4, and based on the addition unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random number value R4, the number of games added lottery and difference A process of determining which of the lottery selections to execute (determination unit addition) is performed. Thus, in the extra unit determination lottery process, the sub CPU 402 determines an extra unit in the first ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-4.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of games has been determined to be added as a result of the addition unit determination lottery in step S302-3-4-5-24-3. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-24-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-5. If it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-24-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-6. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag in the sub RAM 405 game number addition flag storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random number value R3, and based on either the added game number determination table (see FIG. 21) or the added difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3, the ART state The number of games that can be played in the game or the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the ART state is added and a lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-8.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-8)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-8, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-8 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Second ART state processing)
Next, the processing for the second ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART state process at the time of accepting reel rotation start.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is an initial state of the second ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state in the second ART state. And when it determines with it being the initial state of a 2nd ART state (step S302-3-4-5-25-1 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-4-5-25-2. If it is determined that the current state is not the initial state of the second ART state (step S302-3-4-5-25-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-7. .

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the unit concealment flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-3, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains a random number value R4 and performs processing for determining an additional unit based on an addition unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R4. Do. In this way, in the extra unit determination lottery process, it is determined which of the game number extra lottery and the difference number extra lottery is performed in the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-4.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-4)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is decided to add the number of games as a result of the addition unit determination lottery in step S302-3-4-5-25-3. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-25-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-5. If it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-25-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-6. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-6)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number-of-games additional flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag in the sub RAM 405 game number addition flag storage area. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-7)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-7, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on either the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) or the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the lottery value R4. A lottery is carried out by adding the difference number. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-8)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-8, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the processing in step S302-3-4-5-25-8 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S303 of the main processing in the sub control board. .

(Addition lottery processing)
Next, the extra lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the extra lottery process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first ART state and the second ART state, both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined which one of the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery is executed in the game in the first ART state or the second ART state.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-7-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game number addition flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the game number addition flag is “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-1 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24-7 is performed. -2 is transferred, and if it is determined that the number-of-games addition flag is not "ON" (step S302-3-4-4-24-7-1 = No), step S302-3-4 The process proceeds to -5-24-7-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process for adding the number of games, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the number of games to be added based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random value R3. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2 is completed, the extra lottery process is terminated, and step S302-3-4-5 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is completed. The process proceeds to the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the process for the second ART state at the time of accepting the process of −24-8 or reel rotation start. That is, in the case of the extra lottery process in the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. In the case of the extra lottery process in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process for adding a difference number, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining the difference number to be added based on the addition difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random value R3. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3 is completed, the extra lottery process is terminated, and step S302-3-4-5 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is completed. The process proceeds to the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the process for the second ART state at the time of accepting the process of −24-8 or reel rotation start. That is, in the case of the extra lottery process in the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. In the case of the extra lottery process in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted.

(Number of games added lottery process)
Next, the lottery process for adding the number of games will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of lottery processing for adding the number of games.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3, and, based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random number value R3, adds the number of games that can be played in the first ART state. I do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is won by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the game number addition lottery is won as a result of the lottery process by the game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1. I do. Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of games, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games of “10” or more as the added number of games when the “0” game is not determined as the added number of games. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the number of games. If it is determined that the number of games is added and the lottery is won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24-7- If the processing is shifted to 2-3 and it is determined that the number of games is not selected for the lottery (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2 = No), the number of games is added for the lottery. The processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance or the step S302-3-4 of second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance. The process shifts to -5-25-8. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the number of games in the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. If the game number is added in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-3, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 wins the value of the unit secret game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by adding the number of games in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1 and performing a lottery process. A process of adding the value of the number of added games is performed. In the present embodiment, when the number of games is added or the difference number is won as a result of the lottery, numerical information related to the number of added games or the added difference number is notified in the game, and the unit information is temporarily concealed. That is, in the game, the value of the number of additional games won or the value of the additional difference number is not added to the game number counter or the difference number counter. As a result, the player cannot determine which of the game number and the difference number is won in the game. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-3 is completed, the subroutine for the lottery process for adding the number of games is ended, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is completed. The process proceeds to the process in step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the process for -4-5-24-8 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start reception is accepted. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the number of games in the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. If the game number is added in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Draw lottery process with difference number)
Next, the difference number addition lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating a subroutine of the lottery process for adding the difference number.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random number value R3, and based on the difference number game number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3, the sub CPU 402 obtains the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state. Add lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-2.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-2)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is won by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the difference number addition lottery is won as a result of the lottery processing by the difference number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1. I do. Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the difference number, the sub CPU 402 has determined “0” as the additional difference number, that is, determined the difference number of “20” or more as the additional difference number. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the difference number. If it is determined that the lottery with the difference number is won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24-7- If the processing is shifted to 3-3 and it is determined that the difference number addition lottery is not won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-2 = No), the difference number addition lottery is performed. The processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance or the step S302-3-4 of second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance. The process shifts to -5-25-8. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the difference number in the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start. If the process is shifted to the lottery process for adding the number of sheets in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-3)
In step S302-3-4-4-24-7-3-3, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret difference counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 wins the value of the unit concealment difference counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by adding the difference number in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1 and performing a lottery process. A process of adding the value of the additional difference number is performed. In the present embodiment, when the number of games is added or the difference number is won as a result of the lottery, numerical information related to the number of added games or the added difference number is notified in the game, and the unit information is temporarily concealed. That is, in the game, the value of the number of additional games won or the value of the additional difference number is not added to the game number counter or the difference number counter. As a result, the player cannot determine which of the game number and the difference number is won in the game. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-3 is completed, the difference number addition lottery process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to the process in step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the process for -4-5-24-8 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start reception is accepted. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the difference number in the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start. If the process is shifted to the lottery process for adding the number of sheets in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Process when payout number command is received)
Next, a process at the time of receiving a payout number command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing upon receipt of a payout number command.

(Step S302-3-14-21)
In step S302-3-14-21, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not it is in the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the state number is “03” based on the value stored in the state number storage area provided in the sub RAM 405. If it is determined that the state number is “03” (step S302-3-14-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-22, and the state number is “03”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S302-3-14-21 = No), the subroutine of the process at the time of receiving the payout number command is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-22)
In step S302-3-14-22, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the first ART flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is “ON” (step S302-3-14-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23. And when it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is not “ON” (step S302-3-14-22 = No), step S302-3-14-23 The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-14-23)
In step S302-3-14-23, the sub CPU 402 performs a first ART state process at the time of calculating a payout number, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for subtracting the value of the game number counter, unit secret numerical value addition processing, and the like. When the process of step S302-3-14-23 is completed, the subroutine for the payout number command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24)
In step S302-3-14-24, the sub CPU 402 performs a second ART state process at the time of calculating a payout number, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the difference number counter, unit secret value addition processing, and the like. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24 is completed, the subroutine of the payout number command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts)
Next, the processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART state processing when calculating the number of payouts.

(Step S302-3-14-23-1)
In step S302-3-14-23-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-2.

(Step S302-3-14-23-2)
In step S302-3-14-23-2, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter has become “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter becomes “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter by the process of step S302-3-14-23-1. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-14-23-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-3. When it is determined that the value of the game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-14-23-2 = No), the subroutine for the first ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is ended, and the sub-control The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the substrate.

(Step S302-3-14-23-3)
In step S302-3-14-23-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the unit concealment flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-4.

(Step S302-3-14-23-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-14-23-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of games to be concealed or the difference number is added. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value. If it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value (step S302-3-14-23-4 = Yes), step S302-3-14- When the process proceeds to 23-5 and it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-23-4 = No) ), The subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-23-5)
In step S302-3-14-23-5, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret numerical value addition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-6.

(Step S302-3-14-23-6)
In step S302-3-14-23-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the processing in step S302-3-14-23-5 is addition processing to the difference sheet counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the process of adding the value of the unit concealment difference sheet counter to the difference sheet counter has been performed in step S302-3-14-23-5. And when it determines with the addition process to a difference sheet number counter having been performed (step S302-3-14-23-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-14-23-7, When it is determined that the addition process to the difference sheet counter has not been performed (step S302-3-14-23-6 = No), the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of calculating the payout number is ended, and the sub-control The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the substrate.

(Step S302-3-14-23-7)
In step S302-3-14-23-7, the sub CPU 402 performs a first ART flag switching process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the first ART flag in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. When the process of step S302-3-14-23-7 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process when calculating the number of payouts is completed, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Second ART state processing when calculating the number of payouts)
Next, the processing for the second ART state at the time of calculating the number of payouts will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the second ART state when calculating the number of payouts.

(Step S302-3-14-24-1)
In step S302-3-14-24-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of calculating the acquired difference number in the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the value of the payout number of the game from the payout number command, subtracts the value of the BET number stored when the BET number command is received from the value of the payout number, and acquires the game Calculate the difference value. When the display combination is “replay”, the payout number is “0”, but “3” is automatically added and the BET value is subtracted (0 + 3-3 = 0). The value of the acquired difference number is calculated as “0”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-2.

(Step S302-3-14-24-2)
In step S302-3-14-24-2, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game acquisition difference number is greater than “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game acquisition difference number calculated by the calculation process of the acquisition difference number in step S302-3-14-24-1 is a positive value. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the game acquisition difference number is a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-3. If it is determined that the value of the game acquisition difference number is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-3 = No), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-3)
In step S302-3-14-24-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the difference sheet counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts the value of the game acquisition difference number calculated by the calculation process of the acquisition difference number in step S302-3-14-24-1 from the value of the difference number counter, Update the value of the difference counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-4.

(Step S302-3-14-24-4)
In step S302-3-14-24-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is “0” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the difference number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is “0” or less (step S302-3-14-24-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-5. If it is determined that the value of the difference sheet counter is not equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-14-24-4 = No), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is terminated. The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-5)
In step S302-3-14-24-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the unit concealment flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-6.

(Step S302-3-14-24-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-14-24-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the number of games to be concealed or the difference number is added. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value. When it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-6 = Yes), step S302-3-14- When the process proceeds to 24-7 and it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-6 = No) ), The second ART state processing subroutine at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7)
In step S302-3-14-24-7, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret numerical value addition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-8.

(Step S302-3-14-24-8)
In step S302-3-14-24-8, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the processing in step S302-3-14-24-7 is addition processing to the game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the process of adding the value of the unit concealment difference number counter to the game number counter has been performed in step S302-3-14-24-7. And when it determines with the addition process to a game number counter having been performed (step S302-3-14-24-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-14-24-9, When it is determined that the addition processing to the game number counter has not been performed (step S302-3-14-24-8 = No), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is ended, and the sub-control The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the substrate.

(Step S302-3-14-24-9)
In step S302-3-14-24-9, the sub CPU 402 performs a first ART flag switching process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the first ART flag in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 to “ON”. When the process of step S302-3-14-24-9 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Unit secret value addition processing)
Next, the unit concealment numerical value addition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of unit secret numerical value addition processing.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-1)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the unit concealment game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the unit secret game number counter in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-14-24-7-1 = Yes), step S302-3-14-24-7- If the process proceeds to 4 and it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-14-24-7-1 = No), step S302-3-14 The process is shifted to -24-7-2.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-2)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-2, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for adding the value of the unit concealment game number counter to the game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the same value as the value of the unit secret game number counter in the sub RAM 405 to the game number counter. For example, when the value of the unit secret game number counter is “50”, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “50” to the game number counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-7-3.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-3)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-3, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for resetting the value of the unit secret game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 resets the value of the unit secret game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 to “0”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-7-3 is completed, the unit secret numerical value addition process is terminated, and step S302-3-14-23 of the first ART state process when calculating the number of payouts is completed. The process proceeds to the process of step S302-3-14-24-8 of the process for the second ART state at the time of the process 6 or the calculation of the number of payouts. That is, in the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-6 of the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, and the payout In the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of sheets, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-8 of the second ART state process in calculating the number of payouts.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-4)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-4, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the unit concealment difference number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the unit concealment difference number counter in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the unit confidential difference number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-14-24-7-4 = No), step S302-3-14-24-7- When the process proceeds to 5 and it is determined that the value of the unit concealment difference number counter is “0” (step S302-3-14-24-7-4 = Yes), the unit concealment numerical value addition process is performed. The process is ended, and the process in step S302-3-14-23-6 of the first ART state process when calculating the number of payouts or the process of step S302-3-14-24-8 in the second ART state process when calculating the number of payouts Migrate to That is, in the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-6 of the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, and the payout In the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of sheets, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-8 of the second ART state process in calculating the number of payouts.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-5)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for adding the value of the unit concealment difference number counter to the difference number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding the same value as the value of the unit secret difference number counter of the sub RAM 405 to the difference number counter. For example, when the value of the unit secret difference number counter is “50”, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of adding “50” to the difference number counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-7-6.

(Step S302-3-14-24-7-6)
In step S302-3-14-24-7-6, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to reset the value of the unit concealment difference counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 resets the value of the unit concealment difference counter provided in the sub RAM 405 to “0”. When the processing of step S302-3-14-24-7-6 is completed, the unit secret numerical value addition processing is terminated, and step S302-3-14-23 of the first ART state processing when calculating the number of payouts is completed. The process proceeds to the process of step S302-3-14-24-8 of the process for the second ART state at the time of the process 6 or the calculation of the number of payouts. That is, in the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-6 of the first ART state process at the time of payout number calculation, and the payout In the case of the unit secret numerical value addition process in the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of sheets, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-8 of the second ART state process in calculating the number of payouts.

(About the ART state time chart)
Next, based on FIG. 70, a time chart of the ART state in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 70 shows a first ART state in which the game in the ART state is possible until the number of games of 100 games is exhausted, and a second ART state in which the game in the ART state is possible until the number of paid-out medals reaches 100. 7 is a time chart showing an example of transition of the game state when a game in the ART state including is performed. FIG. 70 shows a time chart when the ART preparation state B is shifted to the ART state.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state in the initial state and information related to the second ART state in the initial state are notified (see (2-1) in FIG. 70). .

  Further, in the initial state of the first ART state, an extra unit determination lottery is executed. As a result of the extra unit determination lottery, when the extra unit is determined to be “number of games”, the extra game number flag is set to “ON” (see (2-2) in FIG. 70).

  Further, in the initial state of the first ART state, the unit concealment flag is set to the “ON” state (see (2-3) in FIG. 70).

  In the game in the first ART state in which the game number addition flag is set to the “ON” state, the game number addition lottery is executed. In addition, when the number of games in the game in which the unit concealment flag is set to “ON” is selected, as a result of the lottery, the unit information related to the number of added games is temporarily concealed and the number of added games Is reported (see (2-4) in FIG. 70). On the other hand, the unit information related to the number of added games is kept secret until the time when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” (see (2-5) in FIG. 70).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the unit concealment flag is set to “OFF”, and unit information related to the number of added games once concealed is notified (see (2-6) in FIG. 70).

  When the unit concealment flag is in the “OFF” state, unit concealment numerical value addition processing is executed, and the value of the number of games related to the number of additional games that are to be concealed is added to the game number counter ((2 in FIG. 70). Refer to -7)). Thereby, after the value of the game number counter once becomes “0”, the value of the game number counter is added, and the game in the first ART state is continued.

  When the value of the game number counter is “0” and the first ART flag is in the “OFF” state, the state shifts from the first ART state to the second ART state (see (2-8) in FIG. 70). ).

  Further, when the additional unit determination lottery is executed in the initial state of the second ART state and the additional unit is determined to be “number of games”, the game number additional flag is set to the “ON” state (FIG. 70). (See (2-9)).

  Further, in the initial state of the second ART state, the unit concealment flag is set to the “ON” state (see (2-10) in FIG. 70).

  In a game in the second ART state, when the value of the difference counter is “0” or less and the first ART flag is “ON”, the state shifts from the second ART state to the first ART state (FIG. 70). (See (2-11)).

(Image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state)
Next, based on FIG.71 and FIG.72, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the game in an ART state is demonstrated.

  FIG. 71A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (2-1) of FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state and information related to the second ART state are notified. Specifically, in the initial state of the first ART state, numerical information and unit information of the first ART state are displayed in the first display area 620 and the initial state display area 640. Also, numerical information and unit information of the second ART state are displayed in the second display area 630 and the initial state display area 640.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the remaining game number display area 622 of the first display area 620, a display is made to notify that the number of remaining games that can be played in the first ART state is “100 games”. The For example, the number-of-games display area 622 includes a character “100” as numerical information relating to the number of remaining games in the first ART state, and a character “G” (game) as unit information relating to the number of remaining games in the first ART state. Can be displayed.

  Further, in the remaining difference number display area 632 of the second display area 630, it is possible to display that the remaining difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state is “100”. For example, in the remaining difference number display area 632, “100” is displayed as numerical information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state, and “sheets” is displayed as unit information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state. be able to.

  Further, in the initial state display area 640, a display for notifying that the number of games in the initial state of the first ART state is “100 games” and that the difference number in the initial state of the second ART state is “100”. It can be performed. For example, the initial state display area 640 can display a character “100” as numerical information in the initial state of the first ART state and a character “G” as unit information in the first ART state. In the initial state display area 640, “100” characters can be displayed as numerical information in the initial state of the second ART state, and “sheets” can be displayed as unit information in the second ART state.

  FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (2-4) in FIG. That is, FIG. 71 (b) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the game number is won in the game in the first ART state. For example, when the result of the game number addition lottery indicates that “300 games” has been won, information on the number of additional games is displayed in the display area 600. Here, in the present embodiment, when the unit concealment flag is in the “ON” state, the unit information related to the number of added games and the added difference number is concealed until a predetermined timing. For example, in the case where “300 games” is added, the unit information “G” (the number of added games is displayed while the characters of the numerical information “300” related to the number of added games in the game are displayed in the display area 600. The character “?” Or a predetermined symbol can be displayed instead of the character “game”. As described above, when the game in the first ART state or the second ART state is won for the addition of the number of games or the addition of the number of differences, the unit information relating to the number of added games or the number of additions of the winning combination in the game is temporarily concealed. .

  FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the period (2-5) of FIG. That is, FIG. 71 (c) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 during the period when the unit information relating to the number of added games or the added difference number is kept secret. In the display area 600, a stock display area 650 is provided. In the stock display area 650, numerical information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number can be displayed in a state where the unit information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number that is to be concealed is concealed. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), among the information “300 games” of the number of additional games that are set as the unit concealment target, the characters “300” are displayed as numerical information, and the unit information “G” (game) is displayed. Instead, the character “?” Can be displayed.

  72 (d-1), (d-2), and (d-3) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (2-6) in FIG. That is, FIGS. 72 (d-1), (d-2), and (d-3) are examples of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the unit information once concealed is notified.

  The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (2-6) in FIG. 70 has characters “game number” and “difference number” indicating unit information as shown in FIG. 72 (d-1). The roulette image B and the image of the character A that shoots an arrow with the roulette as a target can be an effect suggesting that the concealed unit information is subsequently notified.

  FIG. 72 (d-2) is an example of an image displayed following FIG. 72 (d-1). As a display for notifying the unit information that has been targeted for concealment, the character A shoots an arrow with the roulette at the target, and as a result, the image is an image in which the arrow hits an area in which the “number of games” character of the roulette is written. Can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (d-2), the characters “Game determination!” And “300G continuation” can be displayed in the display area 600 to notify the unit information. Further, a value (300) obtained by adding the same number of games as the number of additional games that are to be concealed can be displayed in the remaining game number display area 622. That is, the value “300” of the unit concealment target game number counter related to the number of additional games that are set as the concealment target is reset, and “300” is added to the value of the game number counter, and the value of the game number counter remains as the remaining game. The number display area 622 can display “300G”. Thus, the display which alert | reports the unit information based on the number of additional games once concealed can be performed.

  FIG. 72 (d-3) is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 following the image of FIG. 72 (d-2). As shown in FIG. 72 (d-3), the characters “continue the first round!” Are displayed at the approximate center of the display area 600, and the game in the first ART state is continued following the previous game. The display which alert | reports this can be performed.

  FIG. 72E is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (2-8) in FIG. That is, FIG. 72E is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the initial state of the second ART state. As shown in FIG. 72 (e), it is possible to display the characters “second round start!” In the approximate center of the display area 600, and perform an effect of notifying that the game in the second ART state has started. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the unit information related to the number of added games and the added difference number is temporarily concealed, and the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the value of the difference number counter is “0”. Unit information is notified at the following timing. The notification of the unit information once concealed is not limited to the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the time when the value of the difference counter becomes “0” or less. For example, the unit information that is concealed after the predetermined number of games is exhausted may be notified from the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the time when the value of the difference counter becomes “0” or less. Also, the concealed unit information may be notified at the timing when the value of the game number counter or the difference number counter value reaches a predetermined value. Further, a separate counter may be provided to conceal the unit information related to the added game number and the added difference number for a predetermined period. Furthermore, the concealed unit information may be notified based on the display of a predetermined symbol or on the condition that a predetermined winning area is won.

≪Third embodiment≫
Next, a third embodiment according to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. Like the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment can execute both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery in both the first ART state and the second ART state. . Note that in the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, all unit information of the added game number and the difference number added in the first ART state and the second ART state is once concealed. On the other hand, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may conceal the unit information in the first ART state or the second ART state with respect to the game number addition and the difference number addition that are won in the first ART state or the second ART state. Is determined by lottery.

  In the following description of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, detailed description of the same configuration and processing as the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be omitted, and the first embodiment and A different configuration and process from the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

  First, the random number generator 403 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment generates a random number value R5 in addition to the random number values R2, R3, and R4. The random value R5 is a random number for determining whether or not to temporarily conceal the unit information of the lottery with the number of games and the lottery with the difference number in the first ART state and the second ART state.

  Further, the sub ROM 404 of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is provided with an additional unit concealment determination lottery table (not shown) in addition to the tables in the first embodiment.

  Furthermore, similarly to the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment uses the sub control board 400 based on the value of the game number counter being “0” in the first ART state. The managed state is shifted from the first ART state to the second ART state. Further, in the second ART state, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the second ART state to the first ART state based on the value of the difference sheet counter being “0” or less (FIG. 16). reference).

  The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment performs the ART state processing, the unit concealment numerical value addition processing, and the extra lottery processing in the same manner as the ART state processing, the unit concealment numerical value addition processing, and the extra lottery processing in the second embodiment. It is said that processing. In the following description, processing for the first ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, processing for the second ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, processing for adding the number of games, and the number of differences, which are different processing from the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment The extra lottery process will be described in detail.

(Process for the first ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance)
First, the processing for the first ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not to temporarily conceal the unit information related to the addition of the number of games won or the addition of the difference number in the first ART state and the second ART state is determined by lottery. In addition, when it is determined that the lottery unit information is concealed, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment first notifies the numerical information of the information related to the number of added games and the added difference number, and the unit information is Notification is made when the 1ART state or the 2nd ART state ends.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is step S302-3--4-5-24- of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the second embodiment. Prior to the process of step 2, processes from step S302-3-4-5-24-22 to step S302-3-4-5-24-23 are added. Note that the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-21 of the present embodiment is the same as step S302-3-4-5-24-1 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance of the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing in FIG. Further, the processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-24 to step S302-3-4-5-24-30 in the present embodiment is the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-2 to step S302-3-4-5-24-8.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-21)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-21, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not it is the initial state of the first ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the initial state in the first ART state. If it is determined that the initial state is the first ART state (step S302-3-4-5-24-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-22. If it is determined that the initial state is not the first ART state (step S302-3-4-4-24-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-29. .

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-22, the sub CPU 402 performs unit confidentiality determination lottery processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random value R5, and based on the added unit concealment determination lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R5, the game in the first ART state. , A process for determining whether or not to conceal the extra unit is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-23.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-23)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-23, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not unit secrecy has been determined. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 402 conceals the unit information related to the addition of the number of games or the addition of the number of differences in the game in the first ART state by the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-22. The process of determining is performed. When it is determined that the additional unit is concealed (unit concealment) in the game in the first ART state (step S302-3-4-5-24-23 = Yes), step S302- If the process proceeds to 3-4-5-24-24 and it is determined that it is not determined to conceal the additional unit in the game in the ART state (step S302-3-4-5-24) −23 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-25.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-24)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-24, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the unit concealment flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-24 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-25.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-25)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-25, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random value R4, and performs an additional unit determination lottery process based on the additional unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R4. . Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-26.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-26)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-26, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is decided to add the number of games as a result of the addition unit determination lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-24-25. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-24-26 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-27. When it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-4-24-26 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-28. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-27)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-27, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-29.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-28)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-28, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-29.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-29)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-29, the sub CPU 402 performs processing similar to the addition lottery processing detailed in FIG. 50 in the description of the second embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on either the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) or the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3. Alternatively, a lottery is performed by adding the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-29 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-30.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-30)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-30, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-30 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Second ART state process when reel rotation start is accepted)
Next, the processing for the second ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance.

  As shown in FIG. 58, the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is step S302-3-4-5-25- of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the second embodiment. Prior to the process of step 2, processes from step S302-3-4-5-25-22 to step S302-3-4-5-25-23 are added. Note that the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-21 of the present embodiment is the same as step S302-3-4-5-25-1 of the second ART state process upon accepting reel rotation start of the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing in FIG. Furthermore, the processing from step S302-3-4-5-25-24 to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the present embodiment and the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance of the second embodiment are performed. This is the same as the processing from step S302-3-4-5-25-2 to step S302-3-4-5-25-8.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-21)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-21, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the current state is the initial state of the second ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state in the second ART state. If it is determined that the state is the initial state of the second ART state (step S302-3-4-5-25-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-22. If it is determined that the second ART state is not the initial state (step S302-3-4-5-25-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-29. To do.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-22, the sub CPU 402 performs a unit confidentiality determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random number value R5, and adds the additional value in the second ART state based on the added unit concealment determination lottery table (not shown) stored in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R5. A process for determining whether or not to conceal the unit is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-23.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-23)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-23, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not unit secrecy has been determined. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 402 has determined to conceal the unit information related to the addition of the number of games or the addition of the difference number in the second ART state by the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-22. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the additional unit is concealed (unit concealment) is determined (step S302-3-4-5-25-23 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-25- If the process proceeds to 24 and it is determined that it is not determined to conceal the additional unit (step S302-3-4-5-25-23 = No), step S302-3-4-5 is performed. The process proceeds to 25-25.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-24)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-24, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the unit concealment flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-24 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-25.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-25)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-25, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random value R4, and performs an additional unit determination lottery process based on the additional unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R4. . When the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-25 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-26.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-26)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-26, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is decided to add the number of games as a result of the addition unit determination lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-25-25. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-25-26 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-27. If it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-25-26 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-28. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-27)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-27, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-27 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-29.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-28)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-25-28, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-28 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-29.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-29)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-29, the sub CPU 402 performs processing similar to the addition lottery processing detailed in FIG. 50 in the description of the second embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games that can be played in the ART state based on either the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) or the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3. A lottery is carried out by adding the difference number. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-29 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30.

(Step S302-3-4-5-25-30)
In step S302-3-4-5-25-30, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-25-30 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Number of games added lottery process)
Next, the lottery process for adding the number of games will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of lottery processing for adding the number of games. Note that the additional lottery process in the present embodiment is the same as the additional lottery process in the second embodiment (see FIG. 50). The number-of-games extra lottery process in the following embodiment is executed in the same process as the extra lottery process in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the number-of-games additional lottery process of the present embodiment is performed before the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-3 of the number-of-games additional lottery process in the second embodiment. , Steps S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-23 to Steps S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-24 have been added. The processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21 to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22 of the present embodiment is the same as the game of the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-1 to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-2 of the number addition lottery processing. Furthermore, the processing of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-25 of the present embodiment is the same as step S302-3-4-5-24-7- of the game number addition lottery processing of the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing in 2-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random value R3, and adds the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random value R3. Make a lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery is won by adding the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game number addition lottery is won as a result of the game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21. . Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the number of games, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games of “10” or more as the added number of games when the “0” game is not determined as the added number of games. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the number of games. If it is determined that the number of games is added and the lottery is won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24-7- If the processing shifts to 2-23 and it is determined that the number of games is not selected for the lottery (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-22 = No), the number of games is added for the lottery. The processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 for the first ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted or the step S302-3-4 of the second ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to −5-25-30. That is, in the case where the number of games is added in the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, the processing is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance. In the case where the game number is added in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-23)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-24-7-2-23, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the unit concealment flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the unit concealment flag is “ON” (step S302-3-4-4-24-7-2-23 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24- If the process proceeds to 7-2-25 and it is determined that the unit concealment flag is not “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-23 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to -3--4-5-24-7-2-24.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-24)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-24, the sub CPU 402 performs a game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the number of games to the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 and adds the number of games in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21. Performs processing to add numbers. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-24 is completed, the number of games added lottery process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the process of -4-5-24-30 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. That is, in the case where the number of games is added in the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, the processing is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance. In the case where the game number is added in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-25)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-25, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 wins the value of the unit secret game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by adding the number of games in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-21 and performing a lottery process. A process of adding the value of the number of added games is performed. In the present embodiment, as a result of the unit concealment determination lottery in step S302-3-4-5-24-22 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, unit information relating to the addition of the number of games or the addition of the difference number Is determined to be concealed in the game, the unit information is once concealed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-2-25 is completed, the number of games added lottery process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the process of -4-5-24-30 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. That is, in the case where the number of games is added in the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance, the processing is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance. In the case where the game number is added in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Draw lottery process with difference number)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the difference number addition lottery process will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a subroutine of the lottery process for adding the difference number. Note that the additional lottery process in the present embodiment is the same as the additional lottery process in the second embodiment (see FIG. 50). The difference number extra lottery process in the present embodiment below is executed in the same process as the extra lottery process in the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the difference sheet number addition lottery process of the present embodiment is performed before the process of step S302-3-4-4-24-7-3-3 of the difference sheet number addition lottery process in the second embodiment. Further, processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-23 to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-24 is added. Note that the processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21 to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment. The processing is the same as the processing from step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-1 to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-2 of the number addition lottery processing. Furthermore, the processing of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-25 of the present embodiment is the same as step S302-3-4-5-24-7- of lottery processing with the number of games of the second embodiment. This is the same as the processing in 3-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a lottery process by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3, and based on the difference number game number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3, the sub CPU 402 obtains the difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state. Add lottery. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the lottery has been won by adding the difference number. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the difference number addition lottery is won as a result of the lottery processing by the difference number addition lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21. I do. Here, as a result of performing the lottery process for adding the difference number, the sub CPU 402 has determined “0” as the additional difference number, that is, determined the difference number of “20” or more as the additional difference number. In this case, it is determined that the lottery is won by adding the difference number. If it is determined that the lottery with the difference number is won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24-7- If the process shifts to 3-23 and it is determined that the difference number addition lottery is not won (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-22 = No), the difference number addition lottery is performed. The processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 for the first ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted or the step S302-3-4 of the second ART state processing when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to −5-25-30. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the difference number in the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start. If it is the difference ART addition process in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-23)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-23, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the unit concealment flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the unit confidential flag stored in the unit confidential flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the unit concealment flag is “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-23 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5-24- If the process proceeds to 7-3-25 and it is determined that the unit concealment flag is not “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-23 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to -3--4-5-24-7-3-24.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-24)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-24, the sub CPU 402 performs difference sheet counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 adds the difference number added in the step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21 to the value of the difference sheet counter provided in the sub RAM 405, and the addition difference won in the lottery process. A process of adding the number of sheets is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-24 is completed, the difference number addition lottery process subroutine is ended, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the process of -4-5-24-30 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the difference number in the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start. If it is the difference ART addition process in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(Step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-25)
In step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-25, the sub CPU 402 performs unit secret difference counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 wins the value of the unit concealment difference number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 by adding the difference number in step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-21 and performing a lottery process. A process of adding the value of the additional difference number is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-24-7-3-25 is completed, the difference number addition lottery process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3 of the first ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. The process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the process of -4-5-24-30 or the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. That is, in the case of the lottery process for adding the difference number in the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start, the process is performed in step S302-3-4-5-24-30 of the first ART state process at the time of accepting the reel rotation start. If it is the difference ART addition process in the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-25-30 of the second ART state process when the reel rotation start is accepted. To migrate.

(About the ART state time chart)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the ART state time chart in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 73 shows a first ART state in which the game in the ART state is possible until the number of games of 100 games is exhausted, and a second ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the number of paid-out medals reaches 100. 7 is a time chart showing an example of transition of the game state when a game in the ART state including is performed. FIG. 73 shows a case where the ART preparation state B is shifted to the ART state.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state and information related to the second ART state are notified (see (3-1) in FIG. 73).

  Further, in the initial state of the first ART state, an extra unit determination lottery is executed. As a result of the extra unit determination lottery, when the extra unit is determined to be “number of games”, the extra game number flag is set to “ON” (see (3-2) in FIG. 73).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the unit concealment lottery is executed in the initial state of the first ART state and the second ART state. When the unit concealment is determined by the unit concealment lottery, the unit concealment flag is set to the “ON” state (see (3-3) in FIG. 73).

  In the game in the first ART state in which the game number addition flag is set to the “ON” state, the game number addition lottery is executed. In addition, as a result of the game number addition lottery executed in the game in which the unit concealment flag is set to “ON”, as a result of winning the game number addition, the unit information related to the number of added games is once concealed, Numerical information relating to the number of added games is notified (see (3-4) in FIG. 73).

  The unit information related to the number of added games is kept secret until the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” (see (3-5) in FIG. 73).

  When the value of the game number counter is “0”, the unit concealment flag is set to “OFF”, and unit information related to the number of added games once concealed is notified (see (3-6) in FIG. 73).

  When the unit concealment flag is in the “OFF” state, unit concealment numerical value addition processing is executed, and the number of games related to the number of additional games that are to be concealed is added to the game number counter ((3- of FIG. 73). 7)). Thereby, after the value of the game number counter once becomes “0”, the value of the game number counter is added, and the game in the first ART state is continued.

  When the value of the game number counter is “0” and the first ART flag is in the “OFF” state, the state shifts from the first ART state to the second ART state (see (3-8) in FIG. 73). ).

  Further, in the initial state of the second ART state, an extra unit determination lottery is executed. As a result of the addition unit determination lottery, when the addition unit is determined to be “number of games”, the game number addition flag is set to the “ON” state (see (3-9) in FIG. 73).

  Furthermore, in the initial state of the second ART state, the unit concealment lottery is executed. If the unit concealment is not determined as a result of the unit concealment lottery, the unit concealment flag is set to the “OFF” state (see (3-10) in FIG. 73).

  In a game in the second ART state in which the game number addition flag is set to the “ON” state, a lottery drawing with the game number added is executed. Further, when the number of games added in the game in which the unit concealment flag is set to “OFF” is selected, as a result of winning the number of games, the numerical information and unit information related to the number of added games are not concealed. That is, when the game number addition flag is set to the “ON” state and the game number addition is won, the numerical information and the unit information related to the additional game number are notified in the game ((3 in FIG. 73). -11)).

  In the game in the second ART state, when the value of the difference counter is “0” or less and the first ART flag is in the “ON” state, the state shifts from the second ART state to the first ART state (FIG. 73). (See (3-12)).

(Image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state)
Next, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the game in the ART state will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 74A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (3-1) in FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state and information related to the second ART state are notified. For example, in the initial state of the first ART state, the numerical information and unit information of the first ART state are displayed in the first display area 620 and the initial state display area 640, and the numerical information and unit information of the second ART state are displayed in the second display area 630. And can be displayed in the initial state display area 640.

  As shown in FIG. 74A, the remaining game number display area 622 of the first display area 620 can be displayed to notify the number of remaining games in the first ART state. For example, a character “100” is displayed as numerical information related to the number of remaining games in the first ART state in the game number display area 622, and a character “G” (game) is displayed as unit information related to the number of remaining games in the first ART state. Can be displayed.

  Further, in the remaining difference number display area 632 of the second display area 630, a display for informing of the remaining difference number that can be acquired in the game in the second ART state can be performed. For example, in the remaining difference number display area 632, “100” is displayed as numerical information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state, and “sheets” is displayed as unit information relating to the remaining difference number in the second ART state. Can be made.

  Furthermore, in the initial state display area 640, a display for notifying numerical information and unit information in the initial state of the first ART state can be performed. For example, in the initial state display area 640, the character “100” can be displayed as numerical information in the initial state of the first ART state, and the character “G” or the like can be displayed as unit information. In the initial state display area 640, “100” characters can be displayed as numerical information in the initial state of the second ART state, and “sheets” can be displayed as unit information.

  FIG. 74B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (3-4) in FIG. That is, FIG. 74 (b) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when winning the game number addition in the game in the first ART state. For example, as a result of the number-of-games lottery, if “300 games” is selected to be won, information related to the number of added games can be displayed in the display area 600. Here, in the present embodiment, when the unit concealment flag is in the “ON” state, the unit information related to the number of added games and the added difference number is concealed until a predetermined timing. For example, in a game in which the unit concealment flag is in the “ON” state, when “300 games” is won, the numerical information is notified and the unit information is concealed.

  In a game in which the additional unit is a secret object, when “300 games” is added, the character of the numerical information “300” relating to the number of additional games in the game is displayed in the display area 600 to display unit information. The character “?” Or a predetermined symbol can be displayed in place of the character “G” (game). Thereby, it is possible to notify the numerical information related to the number of added games while keeping the unit information secret. By performing such display, in a game in which the unit concealment flag is set to “ON” in the first ART state or the second ART state, if the game number is added or the difference number is added, the game is won. It is possible to temporarily conceal unit information related to the number of added games or the added difference number.

  FIG. 74C is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 during the period (3-5) in FIG. That is, FIG. 74C shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 during a period in which the unit information related to the number of added games or the added difference number is kept secret. In the display area 600, a stock display area 650 is provided. In the stock display area 650, numerical information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number can be displayed in a state where the unit information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number that is to be concealed is concealed. As shown in FIG. 74 (c), in the stock display area 650, the character “300” is displayed as numerical information among the information “300 games” of the number of added games that are the unit concealment target, and the unit information “G "(Game)" can be displayed instead of "?".

  75 (d-1), (d-2), and (d-3) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (3-6) in FIG. That is, FIG. 75 (d-1) and (d-2) show an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the secret unit information is once notified.

  The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (3-6) in FIG. 73 has characters “game number” and “difference number” indicating unit information as shown in FIG. 75 (d-1). The roulette image B and the image of the character A that shoots an arrow with the roulette as a target can be an effect suggesting that the concealed unit information is subsequently notified.

  FIG. 75 (d-2) is an example of an image displayed following FIG. 75 (d-1). As a display for notifying the unit information that has been targeted for concealment, the character A shoots an arrow with the roulette at the target, and as a result, the image is an image in which the arrow hits an area in which the “number of games” character of the roulette is written. Can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 75 (d-2), the characters “Game determination!” And “300G continuation” can be displayed in the display area 600 to notify the unit information. Further, a value (300) obtained by adding the same number of games as the number of additional games that are to be concealed can be displayed in the remaining game number display area 622. That is, the value “300” of the unit concealment target game number counter related to the number of additional games that are set as the concealment target is reset, and “300” is added to the value of the game number counter, and the value of the game number counter remains as the remaining game. The number display area 622 can display “300G”. Thus, the display which alert | reports the unit information based on the number of additional games once concealed can be performed.

  FIG. 75 (d-3) is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 following the image of FIG. 75 (d-2). As shown in FIG. 75 (d-3), the characters “Continue to the first round!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display area 600, and the game in the first ART state is continued following the previous game. The display which alert | reports this can be performed.

  FIG. 75E is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (3-8) in FIG. That is, FIG. 75E is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the initial state of the second ART state. As shown in FIG. 75 (e), the characters “Second Round Start!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display area 600, and an effect can be provided to notify that the game in the second ART state has started. .

  FIG. 76F is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (3-11) in FIG. That is, FIG. 76 (f) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the unit concealment is not determined as a result of the unit concealment lottery and the game number is won. As shown in FIG. 76 (f), in the game where the unit concealment is not determined, when winning the number of games is won, the numerical information and the unit information related to the number of added games can be notified in the game. Specifically, when the game number of 100 games is won, the character “100” is displayed as numerical information related to the number of added games in the game, and the character “G” (game) is displayed as unit information. Can be displayed in the display area 600.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it is determined by unit concealment lottery whether or not to conceal unit information related to the number of additional games and the additional difference number. When the unit concealment is determined and the winning of the game number addition or the difference number addition is won, the unit information is concealed once and the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the value of the difference counter is The unit information is notified at the timing when it becomes “0” or less. The notification of the unit information once concealed is not limited to the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the time when the value of the difference counter becomes “0” or less. For example, the unit information that is concealed after the predetermined number of games is exhausted may be notified from the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” or the time when the value of the difference counter becomes “0” or less. Also, the concealed unit information may be notified at the timing when the value of the game number counter or the difference number counter value reaches a predetermined value. Further, a separate counter may be provided to conceal the unit information related to the added game number and the added difference number for a predetermined period. Furthermore, the concealed unit information may be notified based on the display of a predetermined symbol or on the condition that a predetermined winning area is won.

≪Fourth embodiment≫
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  In the following description, “round” refers to a period from the initial state of the first ART state to the end of the first ART state, or a period from the initial state of the second ART state to the end of the second ART state. . More specifically, the “round” in the present embodiment refers to a period from the initial state of the first ART state until the number of games in the initial state of the first ART state is consumed, or from the initial state of the second ART state. It means a period until the difference number in the initial state of the 2ART state is acquired. For example, the first ART state round of 100 games in the initial state is a period until the 100 games are consumed in the first ART state. Further, for example, 100 rounds in the second ART state in the initial state is a period until the number of payouts reaches 100 in the second ART state. The “round initial state” is a state in which the first game in the first ART state or the second ART state is started.

  In addition, if the game in the first round is performed in the first ART state, and if 100 games are won in the first round, the added 100 games will be The number of games in the initial round state (after the second).

  Like the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment can execute both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery in both the first ART state and the second ART state. . Note that, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, in the initial state of a round, a lottery for determining an additional unit in the round is executed.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment selects a game for the next round from either the first ART state or the second ART state according to the result of the extra unit determination lottery executed in the initial state of the round. That is, the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the round ([n + 1] round) performed after the end of the round (n-th round) according to the result of the extra unit determination lottery executed in the initial state of the round. It is determined whether the game is played in the first ART state or the second ART state.

  For example, when the additional unit is determined to be “number of games” as a result of the additional unit determination lottery executed in the initial state of the round (n-th round), the “number of games” in the game in the round (n-th round) The execution of the “upward lottery” is determined, and the round (the [n + 1] th round) that is performed after the end of the round is determined to be performed in the “first ART state”. That is, when the round is in the first ART state, if “addition of game number” is determined as a result of the extra unit determination lottery executed in the initial state, “game number addition lottery” in the game in the first ART state. And the game executed after the end of the first ART state is determined to be performed in the “first ART state”.

  Also, for example, when the extra unit is determined to be “difference” as a result of the extra unit determination lottery executed in the initial state of the round (n-th round), in the game in the round (n-th round) “ It is determined that the “lottery for adding the number of differences” will be performed, and that the round (the [n + 1] th round) to be performed after the end of the round is performed in the “second ART state”. In other words, when the round is in the first ART state, if “additional number addition” is determined as a result of the addition unit determination lottery executed in the initial state, the “difference number addition lottery” in the game in the first ART state. It is determined that the game to be executed after the end of the first ART state is performed in the “second ART state”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined as “game number addition” as a result of the extra unit determination lottery in the initial round state, the game of the next round is performed in the “first ART state” in principle. However, as an exception, even if it is determined as “addition of the number of games” as a result of the additional unit determination lottery in the initial round state, the game of the next round may not be performed in the “first ART state”. That is, even if the game unit counter value and the unit concealment counter value are “0” even if it is determined as “game number addition” as a result of the extra unit determination lottery in the initial round state, the next round The game is not performed in the “first ART state”. As a result of the extra unit determination lottery in the initial round state, the game number counter value is determined to be “0” at the end of the round, and the difference counter counter When the value or the value of the unit secret difference number counter is an integer greater than “0”, the game of the next round is played not in the “first ART state” but in the “second ART state”.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the extra unit is concealed during the period from the initial state in the first ART state or the second ART state to the end of the round. Therefore, during the round, the player cannot determine whether a lottery with an additional number of games or a lottery with a difference number is being executed in the current round. Further, the player cannot determine whether the first ART state or the second ART state is performed following the current round. Therefore, the player can continue the game while maintaining a sense of expectation for the extra unit and the unit of the next round, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the following description of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, detailed description of the same configurations and processes as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be omitted, and the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described. A different part from a form is demonstrated.

  First, the random number generator 403 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment generates a random value R5 in addition to the random values R1, R2, R3, R4. The random value R5 is a random number for determining whether or not to temporarily conceal the unit information of the lottery with the number of games and the lottery with the difference number in the first ART state and the second ART state.

  In addition, the sub ROM 404 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is provided with an additional unit concealment determination lottery table (not shown) in addition to the tables in the second embodiment.

  Furthermore, similarly to the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment uses the sub control board 400 based on the value of the game number counter being “0” in the first ART state. The managed state is shifted from the first ART state to the second ART state. Further, in the second ART state, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is shifted from the second ART state to the first ART state based on the value of the difference sheet counter being “0” or less (FIG. 16). reference).

  In the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the unit concealment numerical value addition process is the same as the unit concealment numerical value addition process in the second embodiment. In the following, the processing for the ART state, which is different from the second embodiment, the processing for the first ART state when receiving the reel rotation start, the processing for the second ART state when receiving the reel rotation start, and the processing for the first ART state when calculating the payout number The second ART state process when calculating the number of payouts will be described in detail.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process executed by the sub CPU 402 will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-31)
In step S302-3-4-5-31, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current state is the round state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state of the round. If it is determined that the current state is the initial round state (step S302-3-4-5-31 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-32. If it is determined (step S302-3-4-5-31 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-34.

(Step S302-3-4-5-32)
In step S302-3--4-5-32, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the first round initial state is set. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the first round is in the initial state. More specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current game is the first game after the ART preparation state or the normal state shifts to the ART state. If it is determined that the first round is in the initial state (step S302-3-4-5-32 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-33, and the first round If it is determined that the current state is not the initial state (step S302-3-4-5-32 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-34.

(Step S302-3-4-5-33)
In step S302-3-4-5-33, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the first ART flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the first ART flag in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 to “ON”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-33 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-34.

(Step S302-3-4-5-34)
In step S302-3--4-5-34, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the first ART flag is “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is “ON” (step S302-3-4-5-34 = Yes), step S302-3-4-5 is performed. When the process proceeds to -35 and it is determined that the first ART flag stored in the first ART flag storage area is not “ON” (step S302-3-4-4-34 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to -3--4-5-37.

(Step S302-3-4-5-35)
In step S302-3--4-5-35, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3--4-5-35 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-37. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-4-5-35 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36)
In step S302-3--4-5-36, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance first ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-36 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-4-5-37)
In step S302-3--4-5-37, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is “0” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter provided in the sub RAM 405 is equal to or less than “0”. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is not equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-4-5-37 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-4-5-37 = Yes), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the sub control board The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38)
In step S302-3--4-5-38, the sub CPU 402 performs a reel rotation start acceptance second ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra lottery process and the like. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-38 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Process for the first ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance)
Next, the processing for the first ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART state processing at the time of accepting reel rotation start.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is step S302-3--4-5-24- of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the second embodiment. In place of the first process, the process of step S302-3-4-3-36-1 is provided. Further, in the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance of the present embodiment, step S302-3-4-5-24-2 provided in the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance of the second embodiment. Is not processed. Note that the processing from step S302-3--4-5-36-2 to step S302-3-4-5-36-7 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is the second implementation. This is common to the processing from step S302-3-4-4-24-3 to step S302-3-4-5-24-8 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the embodiment.

(Step S302-3-4-3-36-1)
In step S302-3-4-3-36-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the initial state of the round. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state of the round. And when it determines with it being the initial state of a round (step S302-3-4-3-36-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-4-3-36-2, When it is determined that the initial state is not the first ART state (step S302-3-4-3-36-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-6.

(Step S302-3-4-3-36-2)
In step S302-3-4-3-36-2, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random value R4, and performs an additional unit determination lottery process based on the additional unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R4. . Here, in the present embodiment, as a result of the addition unit determination lottery, it is determined which of the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery is performed in the game in the first ART state, It is determined whether the round to be played is performed in the first ART state or the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-3-36-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-36-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of games has been determined to be added as a result of the addition unit determination lottery process in step S302-3-4-3-36-2. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-36-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-4. If it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3--4-5-36-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-5. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36-4)
In step S302-3-4-5-36-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number-of-games additional flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-36-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-6.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36-5)
In step S302-3-4-5-36-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number-of-games additional flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-36-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-6.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36-6)
In step S302-3-4-5-36-6, the sub CPU 402 performs the extra lottery process detailed in FIG. 50 in the description of the second embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on either the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 62) or the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 62) and the random number value R3. Alternatively, a lottery is performed by adding a difference number that can be acquired in the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-36-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-36-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-36-7)
In step S302-3-4-5-36-7, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-36-7 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Second ART state process when reel rotation start is accepted)
Next, the processing for the second ART state when the reel rotation start is accepted will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is step S302-3-4-5-25- of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the second embodiment. In place of the first process, the process of step S302-3-4-3-38-1 is provided. Further, in the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment, step S302-3-4-5-25-2 provided in the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance of the second embodiment. Is not processed. Note that the processing from step S302-3--4-5-38-2 to step S302-3-4-5-38-7 of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is the second embodiment. Is common to the processing from step S302-3-4-5-25-3 to step S302-3-4-5-25-8 of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance.

(Step S302-3-4-3-38-1)
In step S302-3-4-4-38-1, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the initial state of the round. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state of the round. And when it determines with it being the initial state of a round (step S302-3--4-5-38-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3--4-5-38-2, If it is determined that the current state is not the initial state of the round (step S302-3-4-3-38-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-6.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-2)
In step S302-3-4-5-38-2, the sub CPU 402 performs an extra unit determination lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 acquires the random value R4, and performs an additional unit determination lottery process based on the additional unit determination lottery table (not shown) provided in the sub ROM 404 and the random value R4. . Here, in the present embodiment, as a result of the addition unit determination lottery, it is determined which of the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery is performed in the game in the second ART state, and is performed after the round. It is determined whether the round to be played is performed in the first ART state or the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-38-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-3.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-3)
In step S302-3-4-5-38-3, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is decided to add the number of games as a result of the addition unit determination lottery process in step S302-3-4-5-38-2. If it is determined that the additional unit is determined to be an additional number of games (step S302-3-4-5-38-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-4. If it is determined that the additional unit has not been determined to be the additional number of games (step S302-3--4-5-38-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-5. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-4)
In step S302-3-4-5-38-4, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the number-of-games additional flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-38-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-6.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-5-38-5, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for setting the game number addition flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-38-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-6.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-6)
In step S302-3-4-5-38-6, the sub CPU 402 performs the extra lottery process detailed in FIG. 50 in the description of the second embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 determines the number of games that can be played in the first ART state based on either the additional game number determination table (see FIG. 21) or the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3. Alternatively, a lottery is performed by adding the difference number that can be acquired in the second ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-38-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-38-7.

(Step S302-3-4-5-38-7)
In step S302-3-4-5-38-7, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3-4-5-38-7 is completed, the subroutine of the second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts)
Next, the processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts. Note that the process at the time of receiving a payout number command in this embodiment is the same as the process at the time of receiving a payout number command in the second embodiment (see FIG. 53). The following processing for the first ART state when calculating the number of payouts in the present embodiment is executed in the same process as the processing for receiving the number of payout commands in the second embodiment.

  It should be noted that the processing for the first ART state at the time of calculating the number of payouts in the present embodiment is not performed in step S302-3-14-23-3 of the processing for the first ART state at the time of calculating the number of payouts in the second embodiment. Further, the first ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts in this embodiment is replaced with the process of step S302-3-14-23-6 of the first ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts in the second embodiment. The process of -3-14-23-25 is provided.

(Step S302-3-14-23-21)
In step S302-3-14-23-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter provided in the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-22.

(Step S302-3-14-23-22)
In step S302-3-14-23-22, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the game number counter has become “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game number counter has become “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the game number counter by the process of step S302-3-14-23-21. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the value of the game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-14-23-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-23. When it is determined that the value of the game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-14-23-22 = No), the subroutine for the first ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is ended, and the sub-control The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the substrate.

(Step S302-3-14-23-23)
In step S302-3-14-23-23, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of games to be concealed or the difference number is added. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value. If it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value (step S302-3-14-23-23 = Yes), step S302-3-14- If the process proceeds to 23-24 and it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-23-23 = No) ), The subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-23-24)
In step S302-3-14-23-24, the sub CPU 402 performs the unit concealment numerical value addition processing detailed with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-24 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-25.

(Step S302-3-14-23-25)
In step S302-3-14-23-25, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not the addition of the round is the addition of the number of games. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “ON”. If it is determined that the number-of-games additional flag is not “ON” (step S302-3-14-23-25 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-23-26. If it is determined that the number-of-games addition flag is “ON” (step S302-3-14-23-25 = Yes), the subroutine for the first ART state processing at the time of payout number calculation is terminated, and the sub control board The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process.

(Step S302-3-14-23-26)
In step S302-3-14-23-26, the sub CPU 402 performs a first ART flag switching process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the first ART flag in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-23-26 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Second ART state processing when calculating the number of payouts)
Next, the processing for the second ART state at the time of calculating the number of payouts will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second ART state processing when calculating the number of payouts. Note that the process at the time of receiving a payout number command in this embodiment is the same as the process at the time of receiving a payout number command in the second embodiment (see FIG. 53). The processing for second ART state at the time of calculating the payout number in the present embodiment below is executed in the same process as the processing at the time of receiving the payout number command in the second embodiment.

  In the second ART state processing at the time of payout number calculation in the present embodiment, the processing of step S302-3-14-24-5 of the second ART state processing at the time of payout number calculation in the second embodiment is not performed. Further, the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts in this embodiment is replaced with the process of step S302-3-14-24-8 in the second ART state process at the time of calculating the number of payouts in the second embodiment. The process of -3-14-24-27 is provided.

(Step S302-3-14-24-21)
In step S302-3-14-24-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of calculating the acquired difference number in the game. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 obtains the value of the payout number of the game from the payout number command, subtracts the value of the BET number stored when the BET number command is received from the value of the payout number, and acquires the game Calculate the difference value. When the display combination is “replay”, the payout number is “0”, but “3” is automatically added and the BET value is subtracted (0 + 3-3 = 0). The value of the acquired difference number is calculated as “0”. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-22.

(Step S302-3-14-24-22)
In step S302-3-14-24-22, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game acquisition difference number is greater than “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the game acquisition difference number calculated by the calculation process of the acquisition difference number in step S302-3-14-24-21 is a positive value. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the game acquisition difference number is a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-22 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-23. When it is determined that the value of the game acquisition difference number is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-23 = No), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of payout number calculation is ended. Then, the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-23)
In step S302-3-14-24-23, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for updating the value of the difference sheet counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 subtracts the value of the game acquisition difference number calculated by the acquisition difference number calculation process in step S302-3-14-24-21 from the value of the difference number counter, Update the value of the difference counter. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-24.

(Step S302-3-14-24-24)
In step S302-3-14-24-24, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is “0” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the difference number counter stored in the sub RAM 405 is “0” or less. If it is determined that the value of the difference sheet counter is equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-14-24-24 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-25. If it is determined that the value of the difference counter is not equal to or less than “0” (step S302-3-14-24-24 = No), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of calculating the payout number is terminated. The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-25)
In step S <b> 302-3-14-24-25, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for determining whether or not an additional number of games or a difference number is added as a concealment target. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value. If it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-25 = Yes), step S302-3-14- If the process proceeds to 24-26 and it is determined that the value of the unit secret game number counter or the unit secret difference number counter is not a positive value (step S302-3-14-24-25 = No) ), The second ART state processing subroutine at the time of calculating the number of payouts is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-3-14-24-26)
In step S302-3-14-24-7, the sub CPU 402 performs the unit concealment numerical value addition process detailed with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S302-3-14-24-26 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-27.

(Step S302-3-14-24-27)
In step S <b> 302-3-14-24-27, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the round addition is the difference sheet addition. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to determine whether or not the game number addition flag stored in the game number addition flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 is “OFF”. If it is determined that the game number addition flag is not “OFF” (step S302-3-14-24-27 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-14-24-28. If it is determined that the number-of-games additional flag is “ON” (step S302-3-14-24-27 = Yes), the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of payout number calculation is terminated, and the sub control board The process proceeds to step S303 of the main process.

(Step S302-3-14-24-28)
In step S302-3-14-24-28, the sub CPU 402 performs a first ART flag switching process. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing to set the first ART flag in the first ART flag storage area of the sub RAM 405 to “ON”. When the process of step S302-3-14-24-28 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state process when calculating the number of payouts is completed, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(About the ART state time chart)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the transition of the game performed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, in both the first ART state and the second ART state, both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the unit information relating to the addition of the number of games won during the round or the addition of the difference number is kept secret until the end of the round. In addition, when it is determined that the number of games is to be added as a result of the extra unit determination lottery in the round, in principle, the game of the next round is performed in the first ART state. In addition, as a result of the extra unit determination lottery in the round, if it is decided to add the difference number, the game of the next round is basically performed in the second ART state.

  In FIG. 77, in the initial state of the ART state, the first ART state in which the game in the ART state is possible until the game number of 100 games is consumed, and the game in the ART state until the number of medals paid out reaches 100 pieces. It is an example of a time chart in the case where a game in an ART state including a second ART state that can be performed is performed. FIG. 77 shows an example of a time chart when the ART preparation state B is shifted to the ART state.

  In this embodiment, in the initial state of the first round in the ART state, numerical information and unit information of the first ART state and the second ART state are notified (see (4-1) in FIG. 77).

  Further, in the initial state of the first round, the extra unit determination lottery is executed. Furthermore, as a result of the extra unit determination lottery, the game is determined to be “addition of the number of games” or “addition of the difference number”. As a result of the addition unit determination lottery, when “addition of the number of games” is determined, the addition number of games flag is set to the “ON” state. Further, when the game extra flag is set to the “ON” state, “game number extra” is executed in the round and it is determined that the game in the next round is performed in the “first ART state” in principle. (See (4-2) in FIG. 77).

  In a game in a round in which the number-of-games additional flag is in the “ON” state, a lottery with an additional number of games is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the addition of the number of games won in the game in the round or the addition of the difference number, the unit information is kept secret until the final game of the round. That is, when winning the number of games during the round, the numerical information regarding the number of additional games is notified in a state where the unit information regarding the number of additional games is once concealed ((4-3 in FIG. 77). reference).

  Note that the unit information related to the number of added games is kept secret until the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0” (the last game in the round) (see (4-4) in FIG. 77).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the unit information related to the number of additional games that is once concealed is notified (see (4-5) in FIG. 77).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether the game in the round is performed in the first ART state or the second ART state is determined by the addition unit determined in the immediately preceding round. That is, when “addition of the number of games” is determined by the extra unit determination lottery in the immediately preceding round, the game in the round is performed in the first ART state. On the other hand, if “additional difference” is determined by the additional unit determination lottery in the immediately preceding round, the game in the round is performed in the second ART state.

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0” in the first round, the game of the first round is finished and the game of the second round is started. The time chart of FIG. 77 shows an example in which “addition of the number of games” is determined to be executed in the first round by the additional unit determination lottery in the initial state of the first round. Therefore, the game in the second round is performed in the first ART state (see (4-6) in FIG. 77).

  In the initial state of the second round, an extra unit determination lottery is executed. As a result of the extra unit determination lottery, when the additional unit is determined to be “difference number”, the extra game number flag is set to the “OFF” state (see (4-7) in FIG. 77).

  In a game in a round in which the number-of-games additional flag is set to the “OFF” state, a lottery with a difference number is added. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the addition of the number of games won in the game in the round or the addition of the difference number, the unit information is kept secret until the final game of the round. In other words, if the player is elected to add the difference number during the round, the numerical information related to the additional difference number is notified in a state where the unit information related to the additional difference number is once concealed ((4-8) in FIG. 77). reference).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the unit information related to the additional difference number that is once concealed is notified (see (4-9) in FIG. 77).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0” in the second round, the game of the second round is finished and the game of the third round is started. The time chart of FIG. 77 shows an example in which it is determined that “addition of the number of differences” is executed in the second round by the addition unit determination lottery in the initial state of the second round. Therefore, the game in the third round is performed in the second ART state (see (4-10) in FIG. 77).

  The game in the second ART state is performed until the value of the difference number counter becomes “0” or less in the third round.

(Image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state)
Next, based on FIGS. 78 and 79, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the game in the ART state will be described.

  FIG. 78A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (4-1) in FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the initial state of the first ART state, numerical information related to the first ART state and information related to the second ART state are notified. For example, in the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state can be displayed in the first display area 620 and the initial state display area 640, and information related to the second ART state can be displayed in the second display area 630. .

  In this embodiment, in the initial state of the ART state, a game is first performed in the first ART state. Therefore, the game in the first round is performed in the first ART state. The game of the second round is determined by the result of the extra unit determination lottery executed in the initial state of the first round. For this reason, the initial state display area 630 in the initial state of the first round is not notified of the round in which the game in the second ART state is played in the ART state. That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the initial state display area 640, numerical information and unit information related to the second ART state are displayed, and it is scheduled to play a game in the second ART state. Display to notify. For example, as an example of notifying that a game in the second ART state is scheduled to be performed, the round order in which the game in the second ART state is performed, such as “100th round? Can be displayed.

  FIG. 78B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (4-3) in FIG. FIG. 78 (b) is an example of an image that is displayed when 300 games are added in the lottery drawing. Here, in the present embodiment, the unit information relating to the number of added games and the added difference number is kept secret until the end of the round. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), for example, when 300 games are added up, the character of the numerical information “300” related to the number of added games in the game is displayed in the display area 600, and the number of added games is displayed. Instead of the character of the unit information “G” (game), a character “?” Or a predetermined symbol can be displayed. As described above, when the number of games is added or the difference number is won, the unit information regarding the number of added games or the added difference number won in the game is temporarily concealed.

  FIG. 78 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the period (4-4) of FIG. 77. That is, FIG. 78C shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 during the period when the unit information related to the number of added games or the added difference number is kept secret. In the display area 600, a stock display area 650 is provided. In the stock display area 650, numerical information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number can be displayed in a state where the unit information related to the number of additional games or the additional difference number that is to be concealed is concealed. For example, in the stock display area 650, the character “300” is displayed as numerical information among the information “300 games” of the number of added games that are set as the unit concealment target, and the unit information “G” (game) is changed to “ "?" Can be displayed.

  79 (d-1), (d-2), and (d-3) are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (4-5) in FIG. That is, (d-1), (d-2), and (d-3) in FIG. 79 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 when the unit information once concealed is notified at the timing when the round ends. Examples of images are shown in order.

  The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (4-5) in FIG. 77 has characters “game number” and “difference number” indicating unit information as shown in FIG. 79 (d-1). The roulette image B and the image of the character A that shoots an arrow with the roulette as a target can be an effect suggesting that the concealed unit information is subsequently notified.

  FIG. 79 (d-2) is an example of an image displayed following FIG. 79 (d-1). As a display for notifying the unit information that has been targeted for concealment, the character A shoots an arrow with the roulette at the target, and as a result, the image is an image in which the arrow hits an area in which the “number of games” character of the roulette is written. Can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (d-2), the characters “Game determination!” And “300G continuation” can be displayed in the display area 600 to notify the unit information. Further, a value (300) obtained by adding the same number of games as the number of additional games that are to be concealed can be displayed in the remaining game number display area 622. That is, the value “300” of the unit concealment target game number counter related to the number of additional games that are set as the concealment target is reset, and “300” is added to the value of the game number counter, and the value of the game number counter remains as the remaining game. The number display area 622 can display “300G”. Thus, the display which alert | reports the unit information based on the number of additional games once concealed can be performed.

  FIG. 79 (d-3) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 following the image of FIG. 79 (d-2). As shown in FIG. 79 (d-3), a character “second round decided to be the number of games!” Is displayed in the approximate center of the display area 600, and the game in the next round is performed in the first ART state. An effect to notify can be performed.

  FIG. 79E is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (4-6) in FIG. That is, FIG. 79 (e) is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the initial state of the second round. As shown in FIG. 79 (e), characters such as “second round start!” Can be displayed at the approximate center of the display area 600 to notify that the game of the second round has started. In addition, in the initial state display area 640, characters of “second round 300G” for informing numerical information and unit information in the initial state of the second round can be displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, whether the addition unit is “number of games” or “difference number” is kept secret until the end of the round. Also, whether the game in the next round is performed in the “first ART state” or the “second ART state” is similarly concealed for the period until the end of the round. Therefore, during the round, the player cannot determine whether a lottery with an additional number of games or a lottery with a difference number is being executed in the current round. Further, the player cannot determine whether the first ART state or the second ART state is performed following the current round. Therefore, the player can continue the game while maintaining a sense of expectation for the extra unit and the unit of the next round, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the game in one round, either the game number addition lottery or the difference number addition lottery is executed, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a game in one round, it is possible to execute both a lottery drawing with an additional number of games and a lottery drawing with a difference number added.

  In the present embodiment, one round is a period until the number of games or the number of differences in the initial state of the first ART state or the second ART state is consumed, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a game in one round, when both the game number extra lottery and the difference number extra lottery can be executed, and the game in the round is performed in the first ART state, the game number extra lottery is won. May be configured to add the number of games that can be played in the round and add the difference number that can be acquired in the next round when the difference number is won.

≪Fifth embodiment≫
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. As with the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment can execute both the number-of-games lottery and the difference number-added lottery in the first ART state, and the number-of-games lottery in the second ART state. It is possible to carry out both of the lottery by adding the difference number. In addition, while the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment notifies the numerical information and unit information of the second ART state at the time of transition from the first ART state to the second ART state, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has the ART state. The unit information of the second ART state is notified in the initial state, and the numerical information of the second ART state can be notified at the time of transition from the first ART state to the second ART state.

  In the following description of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, detailed description of the same configuration and processing as those of the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. .

  The sub-RAM 405 of the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is information regarding whether or not the numerical information of the second ART state is concealed in addition to each area of the sub-RAM 405 of the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment. A second ART numerical value concealment flag storage area for storing a certain second ART numerical value concealment flag is provided. In the game in the first ART state, when the second ART numerical concealment flag is “OFF”, the numerical information in the second ART state information is concealed.

  Like the gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is managed by the sub-control board 400 based on the value of the game number counter being “0” in the first ART state. The state is shifted from the first ART state to the second ART state. (See FIG. 15).

(Process for the first ART state at the time of reel rotation start acceptance)
Next, the processing for the first ART state at the time of starting reel rotation executed by the sub CPU 402 will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART state processing. Note that the ART state processing in the present embodiment is the same as the ART state processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). The following first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is executed in the same processing as the ART state processing in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in this embodiment is step S302-3--4-5-2 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the first embodiment. Before the process 1, processes from step S302-3-4-2-21 to step S302-3-4-2-22 are added. Note that the processing from step S302-3--4-5-2-23 to step S302-3--4-5-2-24 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in this embodiment is the first This is the same as the processing from step S302-3--4-5-2-1 to step S302-3--4-5-2-2 of the first ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in one embodiment.

(Step S302-3-4-5-2-21)
In step S302-3--4-5-221, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the initial state of the first ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current game is the first game in the first ART state. And when it determines with it being the initial state of a 1st ART state (step S302-3--4-5-2-21 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3--4-5-222. However, when it is determined that the initial state is not the first ART state (step S302-3--4-5-221 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-23. .

(Step S302-3-4-5-2-22)
In step S302-3--4-5-222, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting the second ART numerical value concealment flag to “ON”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning on the second ART numerical value concealment flag stored in the second ART numerical value concealment flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-2-22 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-23.

(Step S302-3--4-5-2-23)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-23, the sub CPU 402 performs the number-of-games lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. 41 in the description of the first embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3 and, based on the added game number determination table (see FIG. 21) and the random number value R3, performs an extra lottery for the number of games that can be played in the first ART state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3--4-5-2-24.

(Step S302-3--4-5-2-24)
In step S302-3--4-5-2-24, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the process of step S302-3--4-5-2-24 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process on the sub control board. .

(Second ART state process when reel rotation start is accepted)
Next, the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance executed by the sub CPU 402 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART state processing. Note that the ART state processing in the present embodiment is the same as the ART state processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38). The following second ART state process at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is executed in the same process as the ART state process in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in this embodiment is step S302-3--4-5-4- of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the first embodiment. Before the process 1, processes from step S302-3-4-5-4-21 to step S302-3-4-4-4-22 are added. The processing from step S302-3--4-5-4-23 to step S302-3-4-5-4-24 of the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance in the present embodiment is the first implementation. This is the same as the processing from step S302-3--4-5-4-1 to step S302-3--4-5-4-2 of the second ART state processing at the time of accepting reel rotation start.

(Step S302-3-4-5-4-21)
In step S302-3-4-5-4-21, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the initial state of the second ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of determining whether or not the current game is the first game in the second ART state. If it is determined that the state is the initial state of the second ART state (step S302-3-4-4-4-21 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-4-4-22. If it is determined that the state is not the initial state of the second ART state (step S302-3-4-4-4-21 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-4-23. .

(Step S302-3-4-4-4-22)
In step S302-3-4-5-4-22, the sub CPU 402 performs a process of setting the second ART numerical value concealment flag to “OFF”. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 performs processing for turning off the second ART numerical value concealment flag stored in the second ART numerical value concealment flag storage area of the sub RAM 405. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-4-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-4-23.

(Step S302-3-4-5-4-23)
In step S302-3-4-5-4-23, the sub CPU 402 performs the difference number addition lottery process detailed in FIG. 42 in the description of the first embodiment. In this process, the sub CPU 402 obtains the random number value R3, and, based on the additional difference number determination table (see FIG. 22) and the random number value R3, performs an extra lottery for the difference number that allows the game in the second ART state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-5-4-23 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-5-4-24.

(Step S302-3-4-5-4-24)
In step S302-3-4-5-4-24, the sub CPU 402 performs effect determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 402 uses an ART state effect determination table (see FIG. 17C) provided in the sub ROM 404 and information related to the winning area stored by the game information storage process in step S302. Based on this, processing for determining the production contents is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-4-5-4-24 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART state processing at the time of reel rotation start acceptance is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S303 of the main processing on the sub control board. .

(About the ART state time chart)
Next, an ART state time chart will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 80 shows a first ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the number of games of 100 games is exhausted, and a second ART state in which a game in the ART state is possible until the number of paid-out medals reaches 100. 7 is a time chart showing an example of transition of the game state when a game in the ART state including is performed. FIG. 80 shows a case where the ART preparation state B is shifted to the ART state.

  In the initial state of the first ART state, the second ART numerical value concealment flag is set to the “ON” state (see (5-1) in FIG. 80).

  In the present embodiment, when a game in the ART state including both the first ART state and the second ART state is performed, the game is first performed in the first ART state. In the initial state of the first ART state, the numerical information and unit information of the first ART state and the unit information of the second ART state are notified, and the numerical information of the second ART state is concealed (see (5-2) in FIG. 80). ).

  In a game in the first ART state, a lottery is executed by adding the number of games. As a result of the number-of-games lottery, when the number-of-games is won, numerical information and unit information relating to the number of added games are notified (see (5-3) in FIG. 80).

  When the value of the game number counter becomes “0”, the state shifts from the first ART state to the second ART state. In the initial state of the second ART state, the second ART numerical value concealment flag is set to the “OFF” state (see (5-4) in FIG. 80).

  Also, in the initial state of the second ART state, numerical information of the second ART state that has been kept secret in the game during the first ART state is notified (see (5-5) in FIG. 80).

  In the game in the second ART state, the lottery is executed by adding the difference number. As a result of the difference number addition lottery, when the difference number addition is won, numerical information and unit information relating to the addition difference number are notified (see (5-6) in FIG. 80).

  As described above, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment conceals the numerical information of the second ART state numerical information and unit information in the first ART state, and at the timing when the value of the game number counter becomes “0”. The numerical information of the state is notified.

(Image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state)
Next, an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the ART state will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 81A shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing of (5-2) in FIG. In the initial state of the first ART state, information related to the first ART state and unit information related to the second ART state are notified. For example, information relating to the first ART state can be displayed in the first display area 620 and the initial state display area 640, and unit information relating to the second ART state can be displayed in the second display area 630 and the initial state display area 640.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the remaining game number display area 622 of the first display area 620 can be displayed to notify that the remaining game number in the first ART state is “100 games”. More specifically, in the game number display area 622 and the initial state display area 640, “100” is displayed as numerical information relating to the number of remaining games in the first ART state, and the number of games remaining in the first ART state is related. Characters such as “G” (game) can be displayed as unit information.

  Further, the remaining difference number display area 632 and the initial state display area 640 of the second display area 630 can be displayed to indicate that a game in the second ART state is scheduled. That is, in the remaining difference number display area 632 and the initial state display area 640, the character “??” is displayed instead of the numerical information “100” related to the second ART state, and “sheets” is displayed as unit information related to the second ART state. "Can be displayed. Thereby, after the game in the round state of the 1st ART state is completed, the display which suggests that the game in the 2nd ART state is scheduled can be performed.

  FIG. 81B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (5-3) in FIG. For example, in the first ART state, when the game number is added and the result of the lottery is that 300 games are added, the character of the numerical information “300” relating to the number of added games won in the game is displayed in the approximate center of the display area 600. And the character of the unit information “G” (game) can be displayed.

  FIG. 81C is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 at the timing (5-5) in FIG. That is, FIG. 81C is an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 in the initial state of the second ART state. As shown in FIG. 81 (c), it is possible to display that the game has started in the second ART state by displaying the characters “second round entry!” In the approximate center of the display area 600. Also, the numerical information of the second ART state that has been the target of concealment can be displayed in the remaining difference number display area 632 and the initial state display area 640 of the second display area 630. For example, in the remaining difference number display area 632 and the initial state display area 640, the character of the numerical information “100” in the second ART state and the character of the unit information “sheet” in the second ART state can be displayed. Thus, in the present embodiment, the numerical information of the second ART state can be kept secret in the first ART state, and the numerical information of the second ART state can be notified in the initial state of the second ART state.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ART state (first ART state) in which the end condition is managed by the number of games, and the ART state (second ART state) in which the end condition is managed by the difference number of sheets. Can be co-existing, and the entertainment of the game can be improved by giving diversity to the game. Further, in the game in the first ART state, the player can display the information suggesting that the game in the second ART state is scheduled while concealing the numerical information in the second ART state. The game in the first ART state can be digested while maintaining the expectations.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine 1 is an ART machine, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the gaming machine 1 may be an AT machine. For example, assuming that the gaming machine 1 is an AT machine, a game may be played in an AT state including a first AT state in which the end condition is managed by the number of games and a second AT state in which the end condition is managed by the number of games. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the example of the second ART state in which the end condition is managed by the difference number is shown, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the termination condition of the second ART state or the second AT state may be managed by the number of sheets (payout number) that does not subtract the number of betting medals from the number of medals (game media) obtained by winning.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when the ART state includes both the first ART state and the second ART state, the game is first performed in the first ART state, and after the game in the first ART state is finished, the second ART is completed. Although the game in the state is performed, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when a game in the ART state including both the first ART state and the second ART state is performed, the game is first performed in the second ART state, and after the game in the second ART state is finished, the game in the first ART state is completed. A game may be performed. For example, when a game is first performed in the second ART state, the numerical information related to the first ART state is temporarily concealed in the initial state of the second ART state, and the numerical information related to the first ART state is notified at a predetermined timing. It is good also as what to do.

  Furthermore, the game start condition in the first ART state or the second ART state is the timing when the value of the game number counter is subtracted to “0” or until the value of the difference counter is negative. The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the game in the first ART state or the second ART state may be set to the timing at which the value of the game number counter or the value of the difference counter is subtracted to a predetermined value.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, either one of the game number addition lottery or the difference number addition lottery can be executed in one round, but the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to this. That is, regardless of whether the state is the first ART state or the second ART state, it is possible to execute both the game number addition lottery and the difference number addition lottery in one round.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the extra unit determination lottery and the unit concealment determination lottery are performed in the initial state of the first ART state or the second ART state, or the initial state of the round, but the gaming machine of the present invention Is not limited to this. That is, in the initial state of the round or the like, the additional unit determination lottery or the unit concealment determination lottery may not be performed, and the additional unit determination lottery or the unit concealment determination lottery may be performed every time the number of games is added or the difference number is added. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the left reel 17a, the middle reel 17b, and the right reel 17c constitute a plurality of reels of the present application.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the start switch 10sw constitutes a start operation detecting unit of the present application.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the internal lottery process constitutes the internal winning combination determining means of the present application.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the reel control board 100 that controls the stepping motors 101, 102, and 103 and the main CPU 301 constitute the symbol variation means of the present application.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop switch 12sw, and the right stop switch 13sw constitute stop operation detection means of the present application.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the process during reel rotation constitutes the stop control means of the present application.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the gaming state transition process constitutes the gaming state control means of the present application.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side lamp 5, the effect lamp 22, the stop operation order display lamp 30, the speakers 34 and 35, the liquid crystal display device 46, the start lever effect lamp 42, and the sub control board 400 are in the order of the present application. Constitutes a stopping means;

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, although the game machine used for a spinning-reel game machine (slot machine) was demonstrated, you may use for a pachinko game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, and an arrange ball game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game machine 2 Cabinet 2a Hinge mechanism 3 Front door 4 Keyhole 5a, 5b Side lamp 6 Medal slot 7 1BET button 7sw 1BET switch 8 MAX-BET button 8sw MAX-BET switch 9 Settlement button 9sw Settlement switch 10 Start lever 10sw Start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 middle stop button 12sw middle stop switch 13 right stop button 13sw right stop switch 14 stop button unit 15 return button 16 selector 16s medal sensor 17a left reel 17b middle reel 17c right reel 17d reel unit 18 Button 18sw Production button detection switch 19 Cross key 19sw Cross key detection switch 20 Panel 21 Display windows 22a to 22j Production lamp 23 Start lamp 24a -24c BET lamp 25 Stored number display device 26a-26b Game status display lamp 27 Discharged number display device 28 Receivable display lamp 29 Replay display lamp 30a-30c Stop operation sequence display lamp 31 Lumbar panel 32 Sauce unit 33 Medal payout port 34a , 34b Lower speaker 35a, 35b Upper speaker 36 Setting display section 37 Setting change button 37sw Setting change switch 38 External concentration terminal board 39s Selector sensor 40s Reset key sensor 41s Door open sensor 42 Start lever effect lamp 43 Drive board 44 Effect device 45 General-purpose board 46 Liquid crystal display device 100 Reel control boards 101-103 Stepping motor 111s Left reel sensor 112s Middle reel sensor 113s Right reel sensor 200 Relay board 300 Main control board 30 1 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Random number generator 305 I / F circuit 400 Sub control board 401 I / F circuit 402 Sub CPU
403 Random number generator 404 Sub ROM
405 Sub RAM
406 RTC device 410 Production control board 420 Image control unit 421 VDP
422 Liquid crystal control CPU
423 LCD control ROM
424 Liquid crystal control RAM
425 frame counter 426 CGROM
427 VRAM
428 Sound source IC
429 Sound source ROM
430 Lamp Control Unit 431 Lamp Control CPU
432 Lamp control ROM
433 Lamp control RAM
440 Amplifier control board 441 Lower speaker amplifier 442 Upper speaker amplifier 500 Power board 510 Power supply 511 Power button 511sw Power switch 520 Hopper 521 Discharge slit 522 Hopper guide member 523 Guide member 524 Discharge guide member 530 Auxiliary reservoir 530s Auxiliary reservoir Full tank sensor

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each peripheral surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation detected by the player by the start operation detecting means;
A symbol changing means for variably displaying the plurality of symbols by rotating the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the player by the start operation detecting means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
Based on the fact that the stop operation by the player has been detected by the stop operation detecting means and the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stop control of the symbols variably displayed by the symbol varying means Stop control means for performing,
A game state control means for performing control to shift from an unfavorable gaming state unfavorable to the player to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player as compared to the unfavorable gaming state when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied;
When the advantageous game state is controlled by the gaming state control unit, when the stop operation detecting unit detects that the stop operation has been performed in a predetermined order by the internal winning combination determining unit. When a specific winning combination capable of stopping and displaying a specific symbol combination is determined, it has order notification means for notifying the predetermined order,
The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state in which the notification can be executed until a predetermined number of games is consumed, and a second advantageous gaming state in which the notification can be executed until the number of acquired game media reaches a predetermined number. Including
Enabling execution of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state in a series of the advantageous gaming states ;
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a game in the first advantageous gaming state, an addition of the number of game media that can be acquired in the second advantageous gaming state is executable .